xref: /optee_os/lib/libmbedtls/mbedtls/include/mbedtls/ssl.h (revision 273a583ea99627ff3b8ccbbaedbdacecd0909b2e)
1 /**
2  * \file ssl.h
3  *
4  * \brief SSL/TLS functions.
5  */
6 /*
7  *  Copyright The Mbed TLS Contributors
8  *  SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 OR GPL-2.0-or-later
9  */
10 #ifndef MBEDTLS_SSL_H
11 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_H
12 #include "mbedtls/platform_util.h"
13 #include "mbedtls/private_access.h"
14 
15 #include "mbedtls/build_info.h"
16 
17 #include "mbedtls/bignum.h"
18 #include "mbedtls/ecp.h"
19 
20 #include "mbedtls/ssl_ciphersuites.h"
21 
22 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
23 #include "mbedtls/x509_crt.h"
24 #include "mbedtls/x509_crl.h"
25 #endif
26 
27 #if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C)
28 #include "mbedtls/dhm.h"
29 #endif
30 
31 #include "mbedtls/md.h"
32 
33 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_SOME_ECDH_OR_ECDHE_ANY_ENABLED)
34 #include "mbedtls/ecdh.h"
35 #endif
36 
37 #if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
38 #include "mbedtls/platform_time.h"
39 #endif
40 
41 #include "psa/crypto.h"
42 
43 /*
44  * SSL Error codes
45  */
46 /** A cryptographic operation is in progress. Try again later. */
47 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS                -0x7000
48 /** The requested feature is not available. */
49 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE               -0x7080
50 /** Bad input parameters to function. */
51 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA                    -0x7100
52 /** Verification of the message MAC failed. */
53 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC                       -0x7180
54 /** An invalid SSL record was received. */
55 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_RECORD                    -0x7200
56 /** The connection indicated an EOF. */
57 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CONN_EOF                          -0x7280
58 /** A message could not be parsed due to a syntactic error. */
59 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_DECODE_ERROR                      -0x7300
60 /* Error space gap */
61 /** No RNG was provided to the SSL module. */
62 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_RNG                            -0x7400
63 /** No client certification received from the client, but required by the authentication mode. */
64 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE             -0x7480
65 /** Client received an extended server hello containing an unsupported extension */
66 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNSUPPORTED_EXTENSION             -0x7500
67 /** No ALPN protocols supported that the client advertises */
68 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_APPLICATION_PROTOCOL           -0x7580
69 /** The own private key or pre-shared key is not set, but needed. */
70 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PRIVATE_KEY_REQUIRED              -0x7600
71 /** No CA Chain is set, but required to operate. */
72 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CA_CHAIN_REQUIRED                 -0x7680
73 /** An unexpected message was received from our peer. */
74 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_MESSAGE                -0x7700
75 /** A fatal alert message was received from our peer. */
76 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FATAL_ALERT_MESSAGE               -0x7780
77 /** No server could be identified matching the client's SNI. */
78 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME                 -0x7800
79 /** The peer notified us that the connection is going to be closed. */
80 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PEER_CLOSE_NOTIFY                 -0x7880
81 /* Error space gap */
82 /* Error space gap */
83 /** Processing of the Certificate handshake message failed. */
84 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_CERTIFICATE                   -0x7A00
85 /* Error space gap */
86 /** A TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket message has been received. */
87 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET       -0x7B00
88 /** Not possible to read early data */
89 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_READ_EARLY_DATA            -0x7B80
90 /**
91  * Early data has been received as part of an on-going handshake.
92  * This error code can be returned only on server side if and only if early
93  * data has been enabled by means of the mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data() API.
94  * This error code can then be returned by mbedtls_ssl_handshake(),
95  * mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or mbedtls_ssl_write() if
96  * early data has been received as part of the handshake sequence they
97  * triggered. To read the early data, call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data().
98  */
99 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA               -0x7C00
100 /** Not possible to write early data */
101 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA           -0x7C80
102 /* Error space gap */
103 /* Error space gap */
104 /* Error space gap */
105 /* Error space gap */
106 /** Cache entry not found */
107 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CACHE_ENTRY_NOT_FOUND             -0x7E80
108 /** Memory allocation failed */
109 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED                      -0x7F00
110 /** Hardware acceleration function returned with error */
111 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FAILED                   -0x7F80
112 /** Hardware acceleration function skipped / left alone data */
113 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH              -0x6F80
114 /** Handshake protocol not within min/max boundaries */
115 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_PROTOCOL_VERSION              -0x6E80
116 /** The handshake negotiation failed. */
117 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE                 -0x6E00
118 /** Session ticket has expired. */
119 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_SESSION_TICKET_EXPIRED            -0x6D80
120 /** Public key type mismatch (eg, asked for RSA key exchange and presented EC key) */
121 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PK_TYPE_MISMATCH                  -0x6D00
122 /** Unknown identity received (eg, PSK identity) */
123 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNKNOWN_IDENTITY                  -0x6C80
124 /** Internal error (eg, unexpected failure in lower-level module) */
125 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INTERNAL_ERROR                    -0x6C00
126 /** A counter would wrap (eg, too many messages exchanged). */
127 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_COUNTER_WRAPPING                  -0x6B80
128 /** Unexpected message at ServerHello in renegotiation. */
129 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WAITING_SERVER_HELLO_RENEGO       -0x6B00
130 /** DTLS client must retry for hello verification */
131 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED             -0x6A80
132 /** A buffer is too small to receive or write a message */
133 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL                  -0x6A00
134 /* Error space gap */
135 /** No data of requested type currently available on underlying transport. */
136 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ                         -0x6900
137 /** Connection requires a write call. */
138 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE                        -0x6880
139 /** The operation timed out. */
140 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_TIMEOUT                           -0x6800
141 /** The client initiated a reconnect from the same port. */
142 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT                  -0x6780
143 /** Record header looks valid but is not expected. */
144 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_RECORD                 -0x6700
145 /** The alert message received indicates a non-fatal error. */
146 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NON_FATAL                         -0x6680
147 /** A field in a message was incorrect or inconsistent with other fields. */
148 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ILLEGAL_PARAMETER                 -0x6600
149 /** Internal-only message signaling that further message-processing should be done */
150 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CONTINUE_PROCESSING               -0x6580
151 /** The asynchronous operation is not completed yet. */
152 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS                 -0x6500
153 /** Internal-only message signaling that a message arrived early. */
154 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_EARLY_MESSAGE                     -0x6480
155 /* Error space gap */
156 /* Error space gap */
157 /* Error space gap */
158 /* Error space gap */
159 /* Error space gap */
160 /* Error space gap */
161 /* Error space gap */
162 /* Error space gap */
163 /** An encrypted DTLS-frame with an unexpected CID was received. */
164 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID                    -0x6000
165 /** An operation failed due to an unexpected version or configuration. */
166 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH                  -0x5F00
167 /** Invalid value in SSL config */
168 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_CONFIG                        -0x5E80
169 /* Error space gap */
170 /** Attempt to verify a certificate without an expected hostname.
171  * This is usually insecure.
172  *
173  * In TLS clients, when a client authenticates a server through its
174  * certificate, the client normally checks three things:
175  * - the certificate chain must be valid;
176  * - the chain must start from a trusted CA;
177  * - the certificate must cover the server name that is expected by the client.
178  *
179  * Omitting any of these checks is generally insecure, and can allow a
180  * malicious server to impersonate a legitimate server.
181  *
182  * The third check may be safely skipped in some unusual scenarios,
183  * such as networks where eavesdropping is a risk but not active attacks,
184  * or a private PKI where the client equally trusts all servers that are
185  * accredited by the root CA.
186  *
187  * You should call mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname() with the expected server name
188  * before starting a TLS handshake on a client (unless the client is
189  * set up to only use PSK-based authentication, which does not rely on the
190  * host name). If you have determined that server name verification is not
191  * required for security in your scenario, call mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname()
192  * with \p NULL as the server name.
193  *
194  * This error is raised if all of the following conditions are met:
195  *
196  * - A TLS client is configured with the authentication mode
197  *   #MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED (default).
198  * - Certificate authentication is enabled.
199  * - The client does not call mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname().
200  * - The configuration option
201  *   #MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_ALLOW_WEAK_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
202  *   is not enabled.
203  */
204 #define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME  -0x5D80
205 
206 /*
207  * Constants from RFC 8446 for TLS 1.3 PSK modes
208  *
209  * Those are used in the Pre-Shared Key Exchange Modes extension.
210  * See Section 4.2.9 in RFC 8446.
211  */
212 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_PSK_MODE_PURE  0 /* Pure PSK-based exchange  */
213 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_PSK_MODE_ECDHE 1 /* PSK+ECDHE-based exchange */
214 
215 /*
216  * TLS 1.3 NamedGroup values
217  *
218  * From RF 8446
219  *    enum {
220  *         // Elliptic Curve Groups (ECDHE)
221  *         secp256r1(0x0017), secp384r1(0x0018), secp521r1(0x0019),
222  *         x25519(0x001D), x448(0x001E),
223  *         // Finite Field Groups (DHE)
224  *         ffdhe2048(0x0100), ffdhe3072(0x0101), ffdhe4096(0x0102),
225  *         ffdhe6144(0x0103), ffdhe8192(0x0104),
226  *         // Reserved Code Points
227  *         ffdhe_private_use(0x01FC..0x01FF),
228  *         ecdhe_private_use(0xFE00..0xFEFF),
229  *         (0xFFFF)
230  *     } NamedGroup;
231  *
232  */
233 
234 /* Elliptic Curve Groups (ECDHE) */
235 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_NONE               0
236 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP192K1     0x0012
237 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP192R1     0x0013
238 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP224K1     0x0014
239 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP224R1     0x0015
240 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP256K1     0x0016
241 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP256R1     0x0017
242 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP384R1     0x0018
243 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP521R1     0x0019
244 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP256R1       0x001A
245 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP384R1       0x001B
246 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP512R1       0x001C
247 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_X25519        0x001D
248 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_X448          0x001E
249 /* Finite Field Groups (DHE) */
250 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE2048     0x0100
251 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE3072     0x0101
252 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE4096     0x0102
253 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE6144     0x0103
254 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE8192     0x0104
255 
256 /*
257  * TLS 1.3 Key Exchange Modes
258  *
259  * Mbed TLS internal identifiers for use with the SSL configuration API
260  * mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_key_exchange_modes().
261  */
262 
263 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK            (1u << 0)   /*!< Pure-PSK TLS 1.3 key exchange,
264                                                                          *   encompassing both externally agreed PSKs
265                                                                          *   as well as resumption PSKs. */
266 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL      (1u << 1)   /*!< Pure-Ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges,
267                                                                          *   including for example ECDHE and DHE
268                                                                          *   key exchanges. */
269 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL  (1u << 2)   /*!< PSK-Ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges,
270                                                                          *   using both a PSK and an ephemeral
271                                                                          *   key exchange. */
272 
273 /* Convenience macros for sets of key exchanges. */
274 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_ALL                         \
275     (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK              |            \
276      MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL    |            \
277      MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL)          /*!< All TLS 1.3 key exchanges           */
278 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_ALL                     \
279     (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK              |            \
280      MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL)      /*!< All PSK-based TLS 1.3 key exchanges */
281 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL_ALL               \
282     (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL        |            \
283      MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL)      /*!< All ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges */
284 
285 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_NONE   (0)
286 
287 /*
288  * Various constants
289  */
290 
291 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
292 /* These are the high and low bytes of ProtocolVersion as defined by:
293  * - RFC 5246: ProtocolVersion version = { 3, 3 };     // TLS v1.2
294  * - RFC 8446: see section 4.2.1
295  */
296 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3             3
297 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3             3   /*!< TLS v1.2 */
298 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4             4   /*!< TLS v1.3 */
299 #endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
300 
301 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM            0   /*!< TLS      */
302 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM          1   /*!< DTLS     */
303 
304 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_HOST_NAME_LEN           255 /*!< Maximum host name defined in RFC 1035 */
305 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_ALPN_NAME_LEN           255 /*!< Maximum size in bytes of a protocol name in alpn ext., RFC 7301 */
306 
307 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_ALPN_LIST_LEN           65535 /*!< Maximum size in bytes of list in alpn ext., RFC 7301          */
308 
309 /* RFC 6066 section 4, see also mfl_code_to_length in ssl_tls.c
310  * NONE must be zero so that memset()ing structure to zero works */
311 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE           0   /*!< don't use this extension   */
312 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_512            1   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^9      */
313 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_1024           2   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^10     */
314 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_2048           3   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^11     */
315 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_4096           4   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^12     */
316 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_INVALID        5   /*!< first invalid value        */
317 
318 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT                   0
319 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER                   1
320 
321 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_DISABLED        0
322 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED         1
323 
324 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED                0
325 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED                 1
326 
327 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_DISABLED                0
328 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED                 1
329 
330 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_COMPRESS_NULL               0
331 
332 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE                 0
333 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL             1
334 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED             2
335 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_UNSET                3 /* Used only for sni_authmode */
336 
337 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION        0
338 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SECURE_RENEGOTIATION        1
339 
340 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED      0
341 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_ENABLED       1
342 
343 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_DISABLED        0
344 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_ENABLED         1
345 
346 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_NOT_ENFORCED  -1
347 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGO_MAX_RECORDS_DEFAULT  16
348 
349 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION     0
350 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_ALLOW_RENEGOTIATION  1
351 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE      2
352 
353 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNC_HMAC_DISABLED         0
354 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNC_HMAC_ENABLED          1
355 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNCATED_HMAC_LEN          10  /* 80 bits, rfc 6066 section 7 */
356 
357 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED     0
358 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED      1
359 
360 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED  0
361 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED   1
362 
363 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_DEFAULT              0
364 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_SUITEB               2
365 
366 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_ENABLED       1
367 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_DISABLED      0
368 
369 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED        0
370 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED         1
371 
372 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED    0
373 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_SUPPORTED      1
374 
375 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_CLIENT  1
376 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER  0
377 
378 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
379 #if defined(PSA_WANT_ALG_SHA_384)
380 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN        48
381 #elif defined(PSA_WANT_ALG_SHA_256)
382 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN        32
383 #endif
384 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
385 /*
386  * Default range for DTLS retransmission timer value, in milliseconds.
387  * RFC 6347 4.2.4.1 says from 1 second to 60 seconds.
388  */
389 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_TIMEOUT_DFL_MIN    1000
390 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_TIMEOUT_DFL_MAX   60000
391 
392 /*
393  * Whether early data record should be discarded or not and how.
394  *
395  * The client has indicated early data and the server has rejected them.
396  * The server has then to skip past early data by either:
397  * - attempting to deprotect received records using the handshake traffic
398  *   key, discarding records which fail deprotection (up to the configured
399  *   max_early_data_size). Once a record is deprotected successfully,
400  *   it is treated as the start of the client's second flight and the
401  *   server proceeds as with an ordinary 1-RTT handshake.
402  * - skipping all records with an external content type of
403  *   "application_data" (indicating that they are encrypted), up to the
404  *   configured max_early_data_size. This is the expected behavior if the
405  *   server has sent an HelloRetryRequest message. The server ignores
406  *   application data message before 2nd ClientHello.
407  */
408 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_NO_DISCARD 0
409 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_TRY_TO_DEPROTECT_AND_DISCARD 1
410 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISCARD 2
411 
412 /**
413  * \name SECTION: Module settings
414  *
415  * The configuration options you can set for this module are in this section.
416  * Either change them in mbedtls_config.h or define them on the compiler command line.
417  * \{
418  */
419 
420 /*
421  * Maximum fragment length in bytes,
422  * determines the size of each of the two internal I/O buffers.
423  *
424  * Note: the RFC defines the default size of SSL / TLS messages. If you
425  * change the value here, other clients / servers may not be able to
426  * communicate with you anymore. Only change this value if you control
427  * both sides of the connection and have it reduced at both sides, or
428  * if you're using the Max Fragment Length extension and you know all your
429  * peers are using it too!
430  */
431 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN)
432 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN 16384
433 #endif
434 
435 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN)
436 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN 16384
437 #endif
438 
439 /*
440  * Maximum number of heap-allocated bytes for the purpose of
441  * DTLS handshake message reassembly and future message buffering.
442  */
443 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_MAX_BUFFERING)
444 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_MAX_BUFFERING 32768
445 #endif
446 
447 /*
448  * Maximum length of CIDs for incoming and outgoing messages.
449  */
450 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX)
451 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX          32
452 #endif
453 
454 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX)
455 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX         32
456 #endif
457 
458 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_TLS1_3_PADDING_GRANULARITY)
459 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_TLS1_3_PADDING_GRANULARITY 16
460 #endif
461 
462 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE)
463 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE        1024
464 #endif
465 
466 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_AGE_TOLERANCE)
467 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_AGE_TOLERANCE 6000
468 #endif
469 
470 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_NONCE_LENGTH)
471 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_NONCE_LENGTH 32
472 #endif
473 
474 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS)
475 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS 1
476 #endif
477 
478 /** \} name SECTION: Module settings */
479 
480 /*
481  * Default to standard CID mode
482  */
483 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID) && \
484     !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT)
485 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT 0
486 #endif
487 
488 /*
489  * Length of the verify data for secure renegotiation
490  */
491 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN 12
492 
493 /*
494  * Signaling ciphersuite values (SCSV)
495  */
496 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EMPTY_RENEGOTIATION_INFO    0xFF   /**< renegotiation info ext */
497 
498 /*
499  * Supported Signature and Hash algorithms (For TLS 1.2)
500  * RFC 5246 section 7.4.1.4.1
501  */
502 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_NONE                0
503 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_MD5                 1
504 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA1                2
505 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA224              3
506 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA256              4
507 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA384              5
508 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA512              6
509 
510 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_ANON                 0
511 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_RSA                  1
512 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_ECDSA                3
513 
514 /*
515  * TLS 1.3 signature algorithms
516  * RFC 8446, Section 4.2.3
517  */
518 
519 /* RSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5 algorithms */
520 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA256 0x0401
521 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA384 0x0501
522 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA512 0x0601
523 
524 /* ECDSA algorithms */
525 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP256R1_SHA256 0x0403
526 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP384R1_SHA384 0x0503
527 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP521R1_SHA512 0x0603
528 
529 /* RSASSA-PSS algorithms with public key OID rsaEncryption */
530 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA256 0x0804
531 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA384 0x0805
532 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA512 0x0806
533 
534 /* EdDSA algorithms */
535 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ED25519 0x0807
536 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ED448 0x0808
537 
538 /* RSASSA-PSS algorithms with public key OID RSASSA-PSS  */
539 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA256 0x0809
540 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA384 0x080A
541 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA512 0x080B
542 
543 /* LEGACY ALGORITHMS */
544 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA1 0x0201
545 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SHA1     0x0203
546 
547 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_NONE 0x0
548 
549 /*
550  * Client Certificate Types
551  * RFC 5246 section 7.4.4 plus RFC 4492 section 5.5
552  */
553 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_TYPE_RSA_SIGN       1
554 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_TYPE_ECDSA_SIGN    64
555 
556 /*
557  * Message, alert and handshake types
558  */
559 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC     20
560 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_ALERT                  21
561 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_HANDSHAKE              22
562 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_APPLICATION_DATA       23
563 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_CID                    25
564 
565 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_WARNING         1
566 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_FATAL           2
567 
568 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CLOSE_NOTIFY           0  /* 0x00 */
569 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNEXPECTED_MESSAGE    10  /* 0x0A */
570 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_BAD_RECORD_MAC        20  /* 0x14 */
571 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECRYPTION_FAILED     21  /* 0x15 */
572 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_RECORD_OVERFLOW       22  /* 0x16 */
573 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECOMPRESSION_FAILURE 30  /* 0x1E */
574 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE     40  /* 0x28 */
575 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_CERT               41  /* 0x29 */
576 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_BAD_CERT              42  /* 0x2A */
577 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNSUPPORTED_CERT      43  /* 0x2B */
578 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_REVOKED          44  /* 0x2C */
579 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_EXPIRED          45  /* 0x2D */
580 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_UNKNOWN          46  /* 0x2E */
581 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_ILLEGAL_PARAMETER     47  /* 0x2F */
582 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNKNOWN_CA            48  /* 0x30 */
583 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_ACCESS_DENIED         49  /* 0x31 */
584 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECODE_ERROR          50  /* 0x32 */
585 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECRYPT_ERROR         51  /* 0x33 */
586 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_EXPORT_RESTRICTION    60  /* 0x3C */
587 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_PROTOCOL_VERSION      70  /* 0x46 */
588 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY 71  /* 0x47 */
589 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR        80  /* 0x50 */
590 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INAPROPRIATE_FALLBACK 86  /* 0x56 */
591 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_USER_CANCELED         90  /* 0x5A */
592 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_RENEGOTIATION     100  /* 0x64 */
593 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_MISSING_EXTENSION    109  /* 0x6d -- new in TLS 1.3 */
594 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNSUPPORTED_EXT      110  /* 0x6E */
595 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME    112  /* 0x70 */
596 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNKNOWN_PSK_IDENTITY 115  /* 0x73 */
597 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_REQUIRED        116  /* 0x74 */
598 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_APPLICATION_PROTOCOL 120 /* 0x78 */
599 
600 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_HELLO_REQUEST            0
601 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CLIENT_HELLO             1
602 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_HELLO             2
603 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUEST     3
604 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_NEW_SESSION_TICKET       4
605 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_END_OF_EARLY_DATA        5
606 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_ENCRYPTED_EXTENSIONS     8
607 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE             11
608 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_KEY_EXCHANGE     12
609 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE_REQUEST     13
610 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_HELLO_DONE       14
611 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY      15
612 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CLIENT_KEY_EXCHANGE     16
613 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_FINISHED                20
614 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_MESSAGE_HASH           254
615 
616 /*
617  * TLS extensions
618  */
619 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERVERNAME                   0
620 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERVERNAME_HOSTNAME          0
621 
622 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH          1
623 
624 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_TRUNCATED_HMAC               4
625 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_STATUS_REQUEST               5 /* RFC 6066 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
626 
627 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_ELLIPTIC_CURVES   10
628 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_GROUPS            10 /* RFC 8422,7919 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
629 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_POINT_FORMATS     11
630 
631 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SIG_ALG                     13 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
632 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_USE_SRTP                    14
633 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_HEARTBEAT                   15 /* RFC 6520 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
634 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ALPN                        16
635 
636 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SCT                         18 /* RFC 6962 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
637 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CLI_CERT_TYPE               19 /* RFC 7250 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
638 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERV_CERT_TYPE              20 /* RFC 7250 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
639 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PADDING                     21 /* RFC 7685 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
640 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC            22 /* 0x16 */
641 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET  0x0017 /* 23 */
642 
643 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT           28 /* RFC 8449 (implemented for TLS 1.3 only) */
644 
645 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SESSION_TICKET              35
646 
647 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PRE_SHARED_KEY              41 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
648 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_EARLY_DATA                  42 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
649 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_VERSIONS          43 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
650 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_COOKIE                      44 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
651 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PSK_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODES      45 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
652 
653 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CERT_AUTH                   47 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
654 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_OID_FILTERS                 48 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
655 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH         49 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
656 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SIG_ALG_CERT                50 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
657 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_KEY_SHARE                   51 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
658 
659 /*
660  * MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CID is required only when
661  * MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID is defined.
662  */
663 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
664 #if MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT == 0
665 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CID                         54 /* RFC 9146 DTLS 1.2 CID */
666 #else
667 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CID                        254 /* Pre-RFC 9146 DTLS 1.2 CID */
668 #endif
669 #endif
670 
671 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ECJPAKE_KKPP               256 /* experimental */
672 
673 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_RENEGOTIATION_INFO      0xFF01
674 
675 /*
676  * Size defines
677  */
678 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN)
679 /*
680  * If the library supports TLS 1.3 tickets and the cipher suite
681  * TLS1-3-AES-256-GCM-SHA384, set the PSK maximum length to 48 instead of 32.
682  * That way, the TLS 1.3 client and server are able to resume sessions where
683  * the cipher suite is TLS1-3-AES-256-GCM-SHA384 (pre-shared keys are 48
684  * bytes long in that case).
685  */
686 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && \
687     defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
688     defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HAVE_AES) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HAVE_GCM) && \
689     defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA384)
690 #define MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN 48 /* 384 bits */
691 #else
692 #define MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN 32 /* 256 bits */
693 #endif
694 #endif /* !MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN */
695 
696 /* Dummy type used only for its size */
697 union mbedtls_ssl_premaster_secret {
698     unsigned char dummy; /* Make the union non-empty even with SSL disabled */
699 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA_ENABLED)
700     unsigned char _pms_rsa[48];                         /* RFC 5246 8.1.1 */
701 #endif
702 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_RSA_ENABLED)
703     unsigned char _pms_dhm[MBEDTLS_MPI_MAX_SIZE];      /* RFC 5246 8.1.2 */
704 #endif
705 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_RSA_ENABLED)    || \
706     defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_ECDSA_ENABLED)  || \
707     defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_RSA_ENABLED)     || \
708     defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_ECDSA_ENABLED)
709     unsigned char _pms_ecdh[MBEDTLS_ECP_MAX_BYTES];    /* RFC 4492 5.10 */
710 #endif
711 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_PSK_ENABLED)
712     unsigned char _pms_psk[4 + 2 * MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];       /* RFC 4279 2 */
713 #endif
714 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_PSK_ENABLED)
715     unsigned char _pms_dhe_psk[4 + MBEDTLS_MPI_MAX_SIZE
716                                + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];         /* RFC 4279 3 */
717 #endif
718 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA_PSK_ENABLED)
719     unsigned char _pms_rsa_psk[52 + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];      /* RFC 4279 4 */
720 #endif
721 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_PSK_ENABLED)
722     unsigned char _pms_ecdhe_psk[4 + MBEDTLS_ECP_MAX_BYTES
723                                  + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];       /* RFC 5489 2 */
724 #endif
725 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED)
726     unsigned char _pms_ecjpake[32];     /* Thread spec: SHA-256 output */
727 #endif
728 };
729 
730 #define MBEDTLS_PREMASTER_SIZE     sizeof(union mbedtls_ssl_premaster_secret)
731 
732 #define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE         PSA_HASH_MAX_SIZE
733 
734 
735 /* Length in number of bytes of the TLS sequence number */
736 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_SEQUENCE_NUMBER_LEN 8
737 
738 /* Helper to state that client_random and server_random need to be stored
739  * after the handshake is complete. This is required for context serialization
740  * and for the keying material exporter in TLS 1.2. */
741 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CONTEXT_SERIALIZATION) || \
742     (defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEYING_MATERIAL_EXPORT) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2))
743 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_RANDBYTES
744 #endif
745 
746 #ifdef __cplusplus
747 extern "C" {
748 #endif
749 
750 /*
751  * SSL state machine
752  */
753 typedef enum {
754     MBEDTLS_SSL_HELLO_REQUEST,
755     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_HELLO,
756     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO,
757     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CERTIFICATE,
758     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_KEY_EXCHANGE,
759     MBEDTLS_SSL_CERTIFICATE_REQUEST,
760     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO_DONE,
761     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE,
762     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_KEY_EXCHANGE,
763     MBEDTLS_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY,
764     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC,
765     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_FINISHED,
766     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC,
767     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_FINISHED,
768     MBEDTLS_SSL_FLUSH_BUFFERS,
769     MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WRAPUP,
770     MBEDTLS_SSL_NEW_SESSION_TICKET,
771     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUEST_SENT,
772     MBEDTLS_SSL_HELLO_RETRY_REQUEST,
773     MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPTED_EXTENSIONS,
774     MBEDTLS_SSL_END_OF_EARLY_DATA,
775     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY,
776     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_AFTER_SERVER_FINISHED,
777     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_BEFORE_2ND_CLIENT_HELLO,
778     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CCS_AFTER_SERVER_HELLO,
779     MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_AFTER_CLIENT_HELLO,
780     MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CCS_AFTER_HELLO_RETRY_REQUEST,
781     MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_OVER,
782     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_NEW_SESSION_TICKET,
783     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_NEW_SESSION_TICKET_FLUSH,
784 }
785 mbedtls_ssl_states;
786 
787 /*
788  * Early data status, client side only.
789  */
790 
791 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
792 typedef enum {
793 /*
794  * See documentation of mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status().
795  */
796     MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_NOT_INDICATED,
797     MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_ACCEPTED,
798     MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_REJECTED,
799 } mbedtls_ssl_early_data_status;
800 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
801 
802 /**
803  * \brief          Callback type: send data on the network.
804  *
805  * \note           That callback may be either blocking or non-blocking.
806  *
807  * \param ctx      Context for the send callback (typically a file descriptor)
808  * \param buf      Buffer holding the data to send
809  * \param len      Length of the data to send
810  *
811  * \return         The callback must return the number of bytes sent if any,
812  *                 or a non-zero error code.
813  *                 If performing non-blocking I/O, \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
814  *                 must be returned when the operation would block.
815  *
816  * \note           The callback is allowed to send fewer bytes than requested.
817  *                 It must always return the number of bytes actually sent.
818  */
819 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_send_t(void *ctx,
820                                const unsigned char *buf,
821                                size_t len);
822 
823 /**
824  * \brief          Callback type: receive data from the network.
825  *
826  * \note           That callback may be either blocking or non-blocking.
827  *
828  * \param ctx      Context for the receive callback (typically a file
829  *                 descriptor)
830  * \param buf      Buffer to write the received data to
831  * \param len      Length of the receive buffer
832  *
833  * \returns        If data has been received, the positive number of bytes received.
834  * \returns        \c 0 if the connection has been closed.
835  * \returns        If performing non-blocking I/O, \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ
836  *                 must be returned when the operation would block.
837  * \returns        Another negative error code on other kinds of failures.
838  *
839  * \note           The callback may receive fewer bytes than the length of the
840  *                 buffer. It must always return the number of bytes actually
841  *                 received and written to the buffer.
842  */
843 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_recv_t(void *ctx,
844                                unsigned char *buf,
845                                size_t len);
846 
847 /**
848  * \brief          Callback type: receive data from the network, with timeout
849  *
850  * \note           That callback must block until data is received, or the
851  *                 timeout delay expires, or the operation is interrupted by a
852  *                 signal.
853  *
854  * \param ctx      Context for the receive callback (typically a file descriptor)
855  * \param buf      Buffer to write the received data to
856  * \param len      Length of the receive buffer
857  * \param timeout  Maximum number of milliseconds to wait for data
858  *                 0 means no timeout (potentially waiting forever)
859  *
860  * \return         The callback must return the number of bytes received,
861  *                 or a non-zero error code:
862  *                 \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_TIMEOUT if the operation timed out,
863  *                 \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ if interrupted by a signal.
864  *
865  * \note           The callback may receive fewer bytes than the length of the
866  *                 buffer. It must always return the number of bytes actually
867  *                 received and written to the buffer.
868  */
869 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t(void *ctx,
870                                        unsigned char *buf,
871                                        size_t len,
872                                        uint32_t timeout);
873 /**
874  * \brief          Callback type: set a pair of timers/delays to watch
875  *
876  * \param ctx      Context pointer
877  * \param int_ms   Intermediate delay in milliseconds
878  * \param fin_ms   Final delay in milliseconds
879  *                 0 cancels the current timer.
880  *
881  * \note           This callback must at least store the necessary information
882  *                 for the associated \c mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t callback to
883  *                 return correct information.
884  *
885  * \note           If using an event-driven style of programming, an event must
886  *                 be generated when the final delay is passed. The event must
887  *                 cause a call to \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() with the proper
888  *                 SSL context to be scheduled. Care must be taken to ensure
889  *                 that at most one such call happens at a time.
890  *
891  * \note           Only one timer at a time must be running. Calling this
892  *                 function while a timer is running must cancel it. Cancelled
893  *                 timers must not generate any event.
894  */
895 typedef void mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t(void *ctx,
896                                      uint32_t int_ms,
897                                      uint32_t fin_ms);
898 
899 /**
900  * \brief          Callback type: get status of timers/delays
901  *
902  * \param ctx      Context pointer
903  *
904  * \return         This callback must return:
905  *                 -1 if cancelled (fin_ms == 0),
906  *                  0 if none of the delays have passed,
907  *                  1 if only the intermediate delay has passed,
908  *                  2 if the final delay has passed.
909  */
910 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t(void *ctx);
911 
912 /* Defined below */
913 typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_session mbedtls_ssl_session;
914 typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_context mbedtls_ssl_context;
915 typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_config  mbedtls_ssl_config;
916 
917 /* Defined in library/ssl_misc.h */
918 typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_transform mbedtls_ssl_transform;
919 typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params;
920 typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_sig_hash_set_t mbedtls_ssl_sig_hash_set_t;
921 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
922 typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_key_cert mbedtls_ssl_key_cert;
923 #endif
924 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
925 typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_flight_item mbedtls_ssl_flight_item;
926 #endif
927 
928 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
929 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_RESUMPTION                          \
930     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK                        /* 1U << 0 */
931 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_EPHEMERAL_RESUMPTION                \
932     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL              /* 1U << 2 */
933 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_EARLY_DATA                  (1U << 3)
934 
935 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_FLAGS_MASK                                    \
936     (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_RESUMPTION             |      \
937      MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_EPHEMERAL_RESUMPTION   |      \
938      MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_EARLY_DATA)
939 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
940 
941 /**
942  * \brief          Callback type: server-side session cache getter
943  *
944  *                 The session cache is logically a key value store, with
945  *                 keys being session IDs and values being instances of
946  *                 mbedtls_ssl_session.
947  *
948  *                 This callback retrieves an entry in this key-value store.
949  *
950  * \param data            The address of the session cache structure to query.
951  * \param session_id      The buffer holding the session ID to query.
952  * \param session_id_len  The length of \p session_id in Bytes.
953  * \param session         The address of the session structure to populate.
954  *                        It is initialized with mbdtls_ssl_session_init(),
955  *                        and the callback must always leave it in a state
956  *                        where it can safely be freed via
957  *                        mbedtls_ssl_session_free() independent of the
958  *                        return code of this function.
959  *
960  * \return                \c 0 on success
961  * \return                A non-zero return value on failure.
962  *
963  */
964 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t(void *data,
965                                     unsigned char const *session_id,
966                                     size_t session_id_len,
967                                     mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
968 /**
969  * \brief          Callback type: server-side session cache setter
970  *
971  *                 The session cache is logically a key value store, with
972  *                 keys being session IDs and values being instances of
973  *                 mbedtls_ssl_session.
974  *
975  *                 This callback sets an entry in this key-value store.
976  *
977  * \param data            The address of the session cache structure to modify.
978  * \param session_id      The buffer holding the session ID to query.
979  * \param session_id_len  The length of \p session_id in Bytes.
980  * \param session         The address of the session to be stored in the
981  *                        session cache.
982  *
983  * \return                \c 0 on success
984  * \return                A non-zero return value on failure.
985  */
986 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t(void *data,
987                                     unsigned char const *session_id,
988                                     size_t session_id_len,
989                                     const mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
990 
991 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
992 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
993 /**
994  * \brief           Callback type: start external signature operation.
995  *
996  *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to start
997  *                  a signature decryption operation using an
998  *                  external processor. The parameter \p cert contains
999  *                  the public key; it is up to the callback function to
1000  *                  determine how to access the associated private key.
1001  *
1002  *                  This function typically sends or enqueues a request, and
1003  *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
1004  *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
1005  *
1006  *                  The parameters \p ssl and \p cert are guaranteed to remain
1007  *                  valid throughout the handshake. On the other hand, this
1008  *                  function must save the contents of \p hash if the value
1009  *                  is needed for later processing, because the \p hash buffer
1010  *                  is no longer valid after this function returns.
1011  *
1012  *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data()
1013  *                  to store an operation context for later retrieval
1014  *                  by the resume or cancel callback.
1015  *
1016  * \note            For RSA signatures, this function must produce output
1017  *                  that is consistent with PKCS#1 v1.5 in the same way as
1018  *                  mbedtls_rsa_pkcs1_sign(). Before the private key operation,
1019  *                  apply the padding steps described in RFC 8017, section 9.2
1020  *                  "EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5" as follows.
1021  *                  - If \p md_alg is #MBEDTLS_MD_NONE, apply the PKCS#1 v1.5
1022  *                    encoding, treating \p hash as the DigestInfo to be
1023  *                    padded. In other words, apply EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5 starting
1024  *                    from step 3, with `T = hash` and `tLen = hash_len`.
1025  *                  - If `md_alg != MBEDTLS_MD_NONE`, apply the PKCS#1 v1.5
1026  *                    encoding, treating \p hash as the hash to be encoded and
1027  *                    padded. In other words, apply EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5 starting
1028  *                    from step 2, with `digestAlgorithm` obtained by calling
1029  *                    mbedtls_oid_get_oid_by_md() on \p md_alg.
1030  *
1031  * \note            For ECDSA signatures, the output format is the DER encoding
1032  *                  `Ecdsa-Sig-Value` defined in
1033  *                  [RFC 4492 section 5.4](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4492#section-5.4).
1034  *
1035  * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1036  *                        modified other than via
1037  *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
1038  * \param cert            Certificate containing the public key.
1039  *                        In simple cases, this is one of the pointers passed to
1040  *                        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() when configuring the SSL
1041  *                        connection. However, if other callbacks are used, this
1042  *                        property may not hold. For example, if an SNI callback
1043  *                        is registered with mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(), then
1044  *                        this callback determines what certificate is used.
1045  * \param md_alg          Hash algorithm.
1046  * \param hash            Buffer containing the hash. This buffer is
1047  *                        no longer valid when the function returns.
1048  * \param hash_len        Size of the \c hash buffer in bytes.
1049  *
1050  * \return          0 if the operation was started successfully and the SSL
1051  *                  stack should call the resume callback immediately.
1052  * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1053  *                  was started successfully and the SSL stack should return
1054  *                  immediately without calling the resume callback yet.
1055  * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH if the external
1056  *                  processor does not support this key. The SSL stack will
1057  *                  use the private key object instead.
1058  * \return          Any other error indicates a fatal failure and is
1059  *                  propagated up the call chain. The callback should
1060  *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1061  *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1062  *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1063  */
1064 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1065                                      mbedtls_x509_crt *cert,
1066                                      mbedtls_md_type_t md_alg,
1067                                      const unsigned char *hash,
1068                                      size_t hash_len);
1069 
1070 /**
1071  * \brief           Callback type: start external decryption operation.
1072  *
1073  *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to start
1074  *                  an RSA decryption operation using an
1075  *                  external processor. The parameter \p cert contains
1076  *                  the public key; it is up to the callback function to
1077  *                  determine how to access the associated private key.
1078  *
1079  *                  This function typically sends or enqueues a request, and
1080  *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
1081  *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
1082  *
1083  *                  The parameters \p ssl and \p cert are guaranteed to remain
1084  *                  valid throughout the handshake. On the other hand, this
1085  *                  function must save the contents of \p input if the value
1086  *                  is needed for later processing, because the \p input buffer
1087  *                  is no longer valid after this function returns.
1088  *
1089  *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data()
1090  *                  to store an operation context for later retrieval
1091  *                  by the resume or cancel callback.
1092  *
1093  * \warning         RSA decryption as used in TLS is subject to a potential
1094  *                  timing side channel attack first discovered by Bleichenbacher
1095  *                  in 1998. This attack can be remotely exploitable
1096  *                  in practice. To avoid this attack, you must ensure that
1097  *                  if the callback performs an RSA decryption, the time it
1098  *                  takes to execute and return the result does not depend
1099  *                  on whether the RSA decryption succeeded or reported
1100  *                  invalid padding.
1101  *
1102  * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1103  *                        modified other than via
1104  *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
1105  * \param cert            Certificate containing the public key.
1106  *                        In simple cases, this is one of the pointers passed to
1107  *                        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() when configuring the SSL
1108  *                        connection. However, if other callbacks are used, this
1109  *                        property may not hold. For example, if an SNI callback
1110  *                        is registered with mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(), then
1111  *                        this callback determines what certificate is used.
1112  * \param input           Buffer containing the input ciphertext. This buffer
1113  *                        is no longer valid when the function returns.
1114  * \param input_len       Size of the \p input buffer in bytes.
1115  *
1116  * \return          0 if the operation was started successfully and the SSL
1117  *                  stack should call the resume callback immediately.
1118  * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1119  *                  was started successfully and the SSL stack should return
1120  *                  immediately without calling the resume callback yet.
1121  * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH if the external
1122  *                  processor does not support this key. The SSL stack will
1123  *                  use the private key object instead.
1124  * \return          Any other error indicates a fatal failure and is
1125  *                  propagated up the call chain. The callback should
1126  *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1127  *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1128  *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1129  */
1130 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1131                                         mbedtls_x509_crt *cert,
1132                                         const unsigned char *input,
1133                                         size_t input_len);
1134 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1135 
1136 /**
1137  * \brief           Callback type: resume external operation.
1138  *
1139  *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to resume
1140  *                  an external operation started by the
1141  *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t or
1142  *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t callback.
1143  *
1144  *                  This function typically checks the status of a pending
1145  *                  request or causes the request queue to make progress, and
1146  *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
1147  *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
1148  *
1149  *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data()
1150  *                  to retrieve an operation context set by the start callback.
1151  *                  It may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data() to modify
1152  *                  this context.
1153  *
1154  *                  Note that when this function returns a status other than
1155  *                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS, it must free any
1156  *                  resources associated with the operation.
1157  *
1158  * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1159  *                        modified other than via
1160  *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
1161  * \param output          Buffer containing the output (signature or decrypted
1162  *                        data) on success.
1163  * \param output_len      On success, number of bytes written to \p output.
1164  * \param output_size     Size of the \p output buffer in bytes.
1165  *
1166  * \return          0 if output of the operation is available in the
1167  *                  \p output buffer.
1168  * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1169  *                  is still in progress. Subsequent requests for progress
1170  *                  on the SSL connection will call the resume callback
1171  *                  again.
1172  * \return          Any other error means that the operation is aborted.
1173  *                  The SSL handshake is aborted. The callback should
1174  *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1175  *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1176  *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1177  */
1178 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1179                                        unsigned char *output,
1180                                        size_t *output_len,
1181                                        size_t output_size);
1182 
1183 /**
1184  * \brief           Callback type: cancel external operation.
1185  *
1186  *                  This callback is called if an SSL connection is closed
1187  *                  while an asynchronous operation is in progress. Note that
1188  *                  this callback is not called if the
1189  *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t callback has run and has
1190  *                  returned a value other than
1191  *                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS, since in that case
1192  *                  the asynchronous operation has already completed.
1193  *
1194  *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data()
1195  *                  to retrieve an operation context set by the start callback.
1196  *
1197  * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1198  *                        modified.
1199  */
1200 typedef void mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
1201 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
1202 
1203 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED) &&        \
1204     !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE)
1205 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_MAX_LEN  48
1206 #if defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA256)
1207 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA256
1208 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  32
1209 #elif defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA384)
1210 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA384
1211 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  48
1212 #elif defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA1)
1213 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA1
1214 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  20
1215 #else
1216 /* This is already checked in check_config.h, but be sure. */
1217 #error "Bad configuration - need SHA-1, SHA-256 or SHA-512 enabled to compute digest of peer CRT."
1218 #endif
1219 #endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED &&
1220           !MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1221 
1222 typedef struct {
1223     unsigned char client_application_traffic_secret_N[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1224     unsigned char server_application_traffic_secret_N[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1225     unsigned char exporter_master_secret[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1226     unsigned char resumption_master_secret[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1227 } mbedtls_ssl_tls13_application_secrets;
1228 
1229 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1230 
1231 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_MKI_LENGTH             255
1232 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_PROFILE_LIST_LENGTH    4
1233 /*
1234  * For code readability use a typedef for DTLS-SRTP profiles
1235  *
1236  * Use_srtp extension protection profiles values as defined in
1237  * http://www.iana.org/assignments/srtp-protection/srtp-protection.xhtml
1238  *
1239  * Reminder: if this list is expanded mbedtls_ssl_check_srtp_profile_value
1240  * must be updated too.
1241  */
1242 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80     ((uint16_t) 0x0001)
1243 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32     ((uint16_t) 0x0002)
1244 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80          ((uint16_t) 0x0005)
1245 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32          ((uint16_t) 0x0006)
1246 /* This one is not iana defined, but for code readability. */
1247 #define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET                      ((uint16_t) 0x0000)
1248 
1249 typedef uint16_t mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile;
1250 
1251 typedef struct mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info_t {
1252     /*! The SRTP profile that was negotiated. */
1253     mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(chosen_dtls_srtp_profile);
1254     /*! The length of mki_value. */
1255     uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mki_len);
1256     /*! The mki_value used, with max size of 256 bytes. */
1257     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mki_value)[MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_MKI_LENGTH];
1258 }
1259 mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info;
1260 
1261 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1262 
1263 /** Human-friendly representation of the (D)TLS protocol version. */
1264 typedef enum {
1265     MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN, /*!< Context not in use or version not yet negotiated. */
1266     MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_TLS1_2 = 0x0303, /*!< (D)TLS 1.2 */
1267     MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_TLS1_3 = 0x0304, /*!< (D)TLS 1.3 */
1268 } mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version;
1269 
1270 /*
1271  * This structure is used for storing current session data.
1272  *
1273  * Note: when changing this definition, we need to check and update:
1274  *  - in tests/suites/test_suite_ssl.function:
1275  *      ssl_populate_session() and ssl_serialize_session_save_load()
1276  *  - in library/ssl_tls.c:
1277  *      mbedtls_ssl_session_init() and mbedtls_ssl_session_free()
1278  *      mbedtls_ssl_session_save() and ssl_session_load()
1279  *      ssl_session_copy()
1280  */
1281 struct mbedtls_ssl_session {
1282 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
1283     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mfl_code);     /*!< MaxFragmentLength negotiated by peer */
1284 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH */
1285 
1286 /*!< RecordSizeLimit received from the peer */
1287 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT)
1288     uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(record_size_limit);
1289 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT */
1290 
1291     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(exported);
1292     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);          /*!< 0: client, 1: server */
1293 
1294     /** TLS version negotiated in the session. Used if and when renegotiating
1295      *  or resuming a session instead of the configured minor TLS version.
1296      */
1297     mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
1298 
1299 #if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
1300     mbedtls_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(start);       /*!< start time of current session */
1301 #endif
1302     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite);            /*!< chosen ciphersuite */
1303     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id_len);              /*!< session id length  */
1304     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id)[32];       /*!< session identifier */
1305     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(master)[48];   /*!< the master secret  */
1306 
1307 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1308 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE)
1309     mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert);       /*!< peer X.509 cert chain */
1310 #else /* MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1311     /*! The digest of the peer's end-CRT. This must be kept to detect CRT
1312      *  changes during renegotiation, mitigating the triple handshake attack. */
1313     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest);
1314     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest_len);
1315     mbedtls_md_type_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest_type);
1316 #endif /* !MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1317 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1318     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(verify_result);          /*!<  verification result     */
1319 
1320 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1321     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket);      /*!< RFC 5077 session ticket */
1322     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_len);          /*!< session ticket length   */
1323     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_lifetime);   /*!< ticket lifetime hint    */
1324 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
1325 
1326 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
1327     defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
1328     /*! When a ticket is created by a TLS server as part of an established TLS
1329      *  session, the ticket creation time may need to be saved for the ticket
1330      *  module to be able to check the ticket age when the ticket is used.
1331      *  That's the purpose of this field.
1332      *  Before creating a new ticket, an Mbed TLS server set this field with
1333      *  its current time in milliseconds. This time may then be saved in the
1334      *  session ticket data by the session ticket writing function and
1335      *  recovered by the ticket parsing function later when the ticket is used.
1336      *  The ticket module may then use this time to compute the ticket age and
1337      *  determine if it has expired or not.
1338      *  The Mbed TLS implementations of the session ticket writing and parsing
1339      *  functions save and retrieve the ticket creation time as part of the
1340      *  session ticket data. The session ticket parsing function relies on
1341      *  the mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ticket_creation_time() API to get the
1342      *  ticket creation time from the session ticket data.
1343      */
1344     mbedtls_ms_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_creation_time);
1345 #endif
1346 
1347 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
1348     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_age_add);     /*!< Randomly generated value used to obscure the age of the ticket */
1349     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_flags);        /*!< Ticket flags */
1350     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(resumption_key_len);  /*!< resumption_key length */
1351     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(resumption_key)[MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN];
1352 
1353 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1354     char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);             /*!< host name binded with tickets */
1355 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
1356 
1357 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1358     char *ticket_alpn;                      /*!< ALPN negotiated in the session
1359                                                  during which the ticket was generated. */
1360 #endif
1361 
1362 #if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1363     /*! Time in milliseconds when the last ticket was received. */
1364     mbedtls_ms_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_reception_time);
1365 #endif
1366 #endif /*  MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
1367 
1368 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1369     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_early_data_size);          /*!< maximum amount of early data in tickets */
1370 #endif
1371 
1372 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
1373     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(encrypt_then_mac);       /*!< flag for EtM activation                */
1374 #endif
1375 
1376 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1377     mbedtls_ssl_tls13_application_secrets MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(app_secrets);
1378 #endif
1379 };
1380 
1381 /*
1382  * Identifiers for PRFs used in various versions of TLS.
1383  */
1384 typedef enum {
1385     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_NONE,
1386     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_SHA384,
1387     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_SHA256,
1388     MBEDTLS_SSL_HKDF_EXPAND_SHA384,
1389     MBEDTLS_SSL_HKDF_EXPAND_SHA256
1390 }
1391 mbedtls_tls_prf_types;
1392 
1393 typedef enum {
1394     MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS12_MASTER_SECRET = 0,
1395 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1396     MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_EARLY_SECRET,
1397     MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_EARLY_EXPORTER_SECRET,
1398     MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_HANDSHAKE_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1399     MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_SERVER_HANDSHAKE_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1400     MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_APPLICATION_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1401     MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_SERVER_APPLICATION_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1402 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1403 } mbedtls_ssl_key_export_type;
1404 
1405 /**
1406  * \brief           Callback type: Export key alongside random values for
1407  *                                 session identification, and PRF for
1408  *                                 implementation of TLS key exporters.
1409  *
1410  * \param p_expkey   Context for the callback.
1411  * \param type       The type of the key that is being exported.
1412  * \param secret     The address of the buffer holding the secret
1413  *                   that's being exporterd.
1414  * \param secret_len The length of \p secret in bytes.
1415  * \param client_random The client random bytes.
1416  * \param server_random The server random bytes.
1417  * \param tls_prf_type The identifier for the PRF used in the handshake
1418  *                     to which the key belongs.
1419  */
1420 typedef void mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t(void *p_expkey,
1421                                        mbedtls_ssl_key_export_type type,
1422                                        const unsigned char *secret,
1423                                        size_t secret_len,
1424                                        const unsigned char client_random[32],
1425                                        const unsigned char server_random[32],
1426                                        mbedtls_tls_prf_types tls_prf_type);
1427 
1428 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1429 /**
1430  * \brief           Callback type: generic handshake callback
1431  *
1432  * \note            Callbacks may use user_data funcs to set/get app user data.
1433  *                  See \c mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p()
1434  *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n()
1435  *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p()
1436  *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n()
1437  *
1438  * \param ssl       \c mbedtls_ssl_context on which the callback is run
1439  *
1440  * \return          The return value of the callback is 0 if successful,
1441  *                  or a specific MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX code, which will cause
1442  *                  the handshake to be aborted.
1443  */
1444 typedef int (*mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t)(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
1445 #endif
1446 
1447 /* A type for storing user data in a library structure.
1448  *
1449  * The representation of type may change in future versions of the library.
1450  * Only the behaviors guaranteed by documented accessor functions are
1451  * guaranteed to remain stable.
1452  */
1453 typedef union {
1454     uintptr_t n;                /* typically a handle to an associated object */
1455     void *p;                    /* typically a pointer to extra data */
1456 } mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t;
1457 
1458 /**
1459  * SSL/TLS configuration to be shared between mbedtls_ssl_context structures.
1460  */
1461 struct mbedtls_ssl_config {
1462     /* Group items mostly by size. This helps to reduce memory wasted to
1463      * padding. It also helps to keep smaller fields early in the structure,
1464      * so that elements tend to be in the 128-element direct access window
1465      * on Arm Thumb, which reduces the code size. */
1466 
1467     mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_tls_version);  /*!< max. TLS version used */
1468     mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(min_tls_version);  /*!< min. TLS version used */
1469 
1470     /*
1471      * Flags (could be bit-fields to save RAM, but separate bytes make
1472      * the code smaller on architectures with an instruction for direct
1473      * byte access).
1474      */
1475 
1476     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);      /*!< 0: client, 1: server               */
1477     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transport);     /*!< 0: stream (TLS), 1: datagram (DTLS)    */
1478     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(authmode);      /*!< MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_XXX             */
1479     /* needed even with renego disabled for LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE          */
1480     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(allow_legacy_renegotiation); /*!< MBEDTLS_LEGACY_XXX   */
1481 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
1482     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mfl_code);      /*!< desired fragment length indicator
1483                                                  (MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_XXX) */
1484 #endif
1485 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
1486     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(encrypt_then_mac); /*!< negotiate encrypt-then-mac?    */
1487 #endif
1488 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET)
1489     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(extended_ms);   /*!< negotiate extended master secret?  */
1490 #endif
1491 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
1492     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(anti_replay);   /*!< detect and prevent replay?         */
1493 #endif
1494 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1495     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(disable_renegotiation); /*!< disable renegotiation?     */
1496 #endif
1497 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
1498     defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1499     /** Encodes two booleans, one stating whether TLS 1.2 session tickets are
1500      *  enabled or not, the other one whether the handling of TLS 1.3
1501      *  NewSessionTicket messages is enabled or not. They are respectively set
1502      *  by mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets() and
1503      *  mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets().
1504      */
1505     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_tickets);   /*!< use session tickets? */
1506 #endif
1507 
1508 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
1509     defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
1510     defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1511     uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(new_session_tickets_count);   /*!< number of NewSessionTicket */
1512 #endif
1513 
1514 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1515     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cert_req_ca_list);  /*!< enable sending CA list in
1516                                                      Certificate Request messages? */
1517     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(respect_cli_pref);  /*!< pick the ciphersuite according to
1518                                                      the client's preferences rather
1519                                                      than ours? */
1520 #endif
1521 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1522     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ignore_unexpected_cid); /*!< Should DTLS record with
1523                                                      *   unexpected CID
1524                                                      *   lead to failure? */
1525 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1526 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1527     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_mki_support); /* support having mki_value
1528                                                        in the use_srtp extension? */
1529 #endif
1530 
1531     /*
1532      * Pointers
1533      */
1534 
1535     /** Allowed ciphersuites for (D)TLS 1.2 (0-terminated)                  */
1536     const int *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite_list);
1537 
1538 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1539     /** Allowed TLS 1.3 key exchange modes.                                 */
1540     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls13_kex_modes);
1541 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1542 
1543     /** Callback for printing debug output                                  */
1544     void(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_dbg))(void *, int, const char *, int, const char *);
1545     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_dbg);                    /*!< context for the debug function     */
1546 
1547     /** Callback for getting (pseudo-)random numbers                        */
1548     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_rng))(void *, unsigned char *, size_t);
1549     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_rng);                    /*!< context for the RNG function       */
1550 
1551     /** Callback to retrieve a session from the cache                       */
1552     mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_get_cache);
1553     /** Callback to store a session into the cache                          */
1554     mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_set_cache);
1555     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_cache);                  /*!< context for cache callbacks        */
1556 
1557 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION)
1558     /** Callback for setting cert according to SNI extension                */
1559     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_sni))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *, size_t);
1560     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_sni);                    /*!< context for SNI callback           */
1561 #endif
1562 
1563 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1564     /** Callback to customize X.509 certificate chain verification          */
1565     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_vrfy))(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *);
1566     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_vrfy);                   /*!< context for X.509 verify calllback */
1567 #endif
1568 
1569 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
1570 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1571     /** Callback to retrieve PSK key from identity                          */
1572     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_psk))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *, size_t);
1573     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_psk);                    /*!< context for PSK callback           */
1574 #endif
1575 #endif
1576 
1577 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1578     /** Callback to create & write a cookie for ClientHello verification    */
1579     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cookie_write))(void *, unsigned char **, unsigned char *,
1580                                           const unsigned char *, size_t);
1581     /** Callback to verify validity of a ClientHello cookie                 */
1582     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cookie_check))(void *, const unsigned char *, size_t,
1583                                           const unsigned char *, size_t);
1584     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_cookie);                 /*!< context for the cookie callbacks   */
1585 #endif
1586 
1587 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1588     /** Callback to create & write a session ticket                         */
1589     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ticket_write))(void *, const mbedtls_ssl_session *,
1590                                           unsigned char *, const unsigned char *, size_t *,
1591                                           uint32_t *);
1592     /** Callback to parse a session ticket into a session structure         */
1593     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ticket_parse))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_session *, unsigned char *, size_t);
1594     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_ticket);                 /*!< context for the ticket callbacks   */
1595 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1596 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1597     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cid_len); /*!< The length of CIDs for incoming DTLS records.      */
1598 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1599 
1600 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1601     const mbedtls_x509_crt_profile *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cert_profile); /*!< verification profile */
1602     mbedtls_ssl_key_cert *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(key_cert); /*!< own certificate/key pair(s)        */
1603     mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ca_chain);     /*!< trusted CAs                        */
1604     mbedtls_x509_crl *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ca_crl);       /*!< trusted CAs CRLs                   */
1605 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK)
1606     mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ca_cb);
1607     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_ca_cb);
1608 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK */
1609 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1610 
1611 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
1612 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1613     mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_sign_start); /*!< start asynchronous signature operation */
1614     mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_decrypt_start); /*!< start asynchronous decryption operation */
1615 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1616     mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_resume); /*!< resume asynchronous operation */
1617     mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_cancel); /*!< cancel asynchronous operation */
1618     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_async_config_data); /*!< Configuration data set by mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb(). */
1619 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
1620 
1621 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED)
1622 
1623 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
1624     const int *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(sig_hashes);         /*!< allowed signature hashes           */
1625 #endif
1626     const uint16_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(sig_algs);      /*!< allowed signature algorithms       */
1627 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED */
1628 
1629 #if defined(MBEDTLS_ECP_C) && !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
1630     const mbedtls_ecp_group_id *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(curve_list); /*!< allowed curves             */
1631 #endif
1632 
1633     const uint16_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(group_list);     /*!< allowed IANA NamedGroups */
1634 
1635 #if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C)
1636     mbedtls_mpi MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_P);              /*!< prime modulus for DHM              */
1637     mbedtls_mpi MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_G);              /*!< generator for DHM                  */
1638 #endif
1639 
1640 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
1641 
1642 #if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
1643     mbedtls_svc_key_id_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_opaque); /*!< PSA key slot holding opaque PSK. This field
1644                                                        *   should only be set via
1645                                                        *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
1646                                                        *   If either no PSK or a raw PSK have been
1647                                                        *   configured, this has value \c 0.
1648                                                        */
1649 #endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
1650     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk);      /*!< The raw pre-shared key. This field should
1651                                                *   only be set via mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1652                                                *   If either no PSK or an opaque PSK
1653                                                *   have been configured, this has value NULL. */
1654     size_t         MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_len);  /*!< The length of the raw pre-shared key.
1655                                                *   This field should only be set via
1656                                                *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1657                                                *   Its value is non-zero if and only if
1658                                                *   \c psk is not \c NULL. */
1659 
1660     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_identity);    /*!< The PSK identity for PSK negotiation.
1661                                                       *   This field should only be set via
1662                                                       *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1663                                                       *   This is set if and only if either
1664                                                       *   \c psk or \c psk_opaque are set. */
1665     size_t         MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_identity_len);/*!< The length of PSK identity.
1666                                                       *   This field should only be set via
1667                                                       *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1668                                                       *   Its value is non-zero if and only if
1669                                                       *   \c psk is not \c NULL or \c psk_opaque
1670                                                       *   is not \c 0. */
1671 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED */
1672 
1673 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1674     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(early_data_enabled);     /*!< Early data enablement:
1675                                                   *   - MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED,
1676                                                   *   - MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED */
1677 
1678 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1679     /* The maximum amount of 0-RTT data. RFC 8446 section 4.6.1 */
1680     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_early_data_size);
1681 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1682 
1683 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
1684 
1685 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
1686     const char **MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alpn_list);         /*!< ordered list of protocols          */
1687 #endif
1688 
1689 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1690     /*! ordered list of supported srtp profile */
1691     const mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_profile_list);
1692     /*! number of supported profiles */
1693     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_profile_list_len);
1694 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1695 
1696     /*
1697      * Numerical settings (int)
1698      */
1699 
1700     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(read_timeout);          /*!< timeout for mbedtls_ssl_read (ms)  */
1701 
1702 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1703     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hs_timeout_min);        /*!< initial value of the handshake
1704                                                         retransmission timeout (ms)        */
1705     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hs_timeout_max);        /*!< maximum value of the handshake
1706                                                         retransmission timeout (ms)        */
1707 #endif
1708 
1709 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1710     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_max_records);         /*!< grace period for renegotiation     */
1711     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_period)[8]; /*!< value of the record counters
1712                                                         that triggers renegotiation        */
1713 #endif
1714 
1715     unsigned int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(badmac_limit);      /*!< limit of records with a bad MAC    */
1716 
1717 #if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1718     unsigned int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_min_bitlen);    /*!< min. bit length of the DHM prime   */
1719 #endif
1720 
1721     /** User data pointer or handle.
1722      *
1723      * The library sets this to \p 0 when creating a context and does not
1724      * access it afterwards.
1725      */
1726     mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data);
1727 
1728 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1729     mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cert_cb);  /*!< certificate selection callback */
1730 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1731 
1732 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
1733     const mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dn_hints);/*!< acceptable client cert issuers    */
1734 #endif
1735 };
1736 
1737 struct mbedtls_ssl_context {
1738     const mbedtls_ssl_config *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(conf); /*!< configuration information          */
1739 
1740     /*
1741      * Miscellaneous
1742      */
1743     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state);                  /*!< SSL handshake: current state     */
1744 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1745     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_status);          /*!< Initial, in progress, pending?   */
1746     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_records_seen);    /*!< Records since renego request, or with DTLS,
1747                                                     number of retransmissions of request if
1748                                                     renego_max_records is < 0           */
1749 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
1750 
1751     /**
1752      * Maximum TLS version to be negotiated, then negotiated TLS version.
1753      *
1754      * It is initialized as the configured maximum TLS version to be
1755      * negotiated by mbedtls_ssl_setup().
1756      *
1757      * When renegotiating or resuming a session, it is overwritten in the
1758      * ClientHello writing preparation stage with the previously negotiated
1759      * TLS version.
1760      *
1761      * On client side, it is updated to the TLS version selected by the server
1762      * for the handshake when the ServerHello is received.
1763      *
1764      * On server side, it is updated to the TLS version the server selects for
1765      * the handshake when the ClientHello is received.
1766      */
1767     mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
1768 
1769 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1770     /**
1771      * State of the negotiation and transfer of early data. Reset to
1772      * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATE_IDLE when the context is reset.
1773      */
1774     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(early_data_state);
1775 #endif
1776 
1777     /** Multipurpose field.
1778      *
1779      * - DTLS: records with a bad MAC received.
1780      * - TLS: accumulated length of handshake fragments (up to \c in_hslen).
1781      *
1782      * This field is multipurpose in order to preserve the ABI in the
1783      * Mbed TLS 3.6 LTS branch. Until 3.6.2, it was only used in DTLS
1784      * and called `badmac_seen`.
1785      */
1786     unsigned MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(badmac_seen_or_in_hsfraglen);
1787 
1788 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1789     /** Callback to customize X.509 certificate chain verification          */
1790     int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_vrfy))(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *);
1791     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_vrfy);                   /*!< context for X.509 verify callback */
1792 #endif
1793 
1794     mbedtls_ssl_send_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_send); /*!< Callback for network send */
1795     mbedtls_ssl_recv_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_recv); /*!< Callback for network receive */
1796     mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_recv_timeout);
1797     /*!< Callback for network receive with timeout */
1798 
1799     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_bio);                /*!< context for I/O operations   */
1800 
1801     /*
1802      * Session layer
1803      */
1804     mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_in);            /*!<  current session data (in)   */
1805     mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_out);           /*!<  current session data (out)  */
1806     mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session);               /*!<  negotiated session data     */
1807     mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_negotiate);     /*!<  session data in negotiation */
1808 
1809     mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(handshake);    /*!<  params required only during
1810                                                                     the handshake process        */
1811 
1812     /*
1813      * Record layer transformations
1814      */
1815     mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_in);        /*!<  current transform params (in)
1816                                                                   *    This is always a reference,
1817                                                                   *    never an owning pointer.        */
1818     mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_out);       /*!<  current transform params (out)
1819                                                                   *    This is always a reference,
1820                                                                   *    never an owning pointer.        */
1821     mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform);           /*!<  negotiated transform params
1822                                                                   *    This pointer owns the transform
1823                                                                   *    it references.                  */
1824 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2)
1825     mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_negotiate); /*!<  transform params in negotiation
1826                                                                   *    This pointer owns the transform
1827                                                                   *    it references.                  */
1828 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2 */
1829 
1830 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1831     /*! The application data transform in TLS 1.3.
1832      *  This pointer owns the transform it references. */
1833     mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_application);
1834 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1835 
1836     /*
1837      * Timers
1838      */
1839     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_timer);              /*!< context for the timer callbacks */
1840 
1841     mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_set_timer);       /*!< set timer callback */
1842     mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_get_timer);       /*!< get timer callback */
1843 
1844     /*
1845      * Record layer (incoming data)
1846      */
1847     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_buf);      /*!< input buffer                     */
1848     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_ctr);      /*!< 64-bit incoming message counter
1849                                                     TLS: maintained by us
1850                                                     DTLS: read from peer             */
1851     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_hdr);      /*!< start of record header           */
1852 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1853     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_cid);      /*!< The start of the CID;
1854                                                   *   (the end is marked by in_len).   */
1855 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1856     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_len);      /*!< two-bytes message length field   */
1857     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_iv);       /*!< ivlen-byte IV                    */
1858     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msg);      /*!< message contents (in_iv+ivlen)   */
1859     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_offt);     /*!< read offset in application data  */
1860 
1861     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msgtype);             /*!< record header: message type      */
1862     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msglen);           /*!< record header: message length    */
1863     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_left);             /*!< amount of data read so far       */
1864 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_VARIABLE_BUFFER_LENGTH)
1865     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_buf_len);          /*!< length of input buffer           */
1866 #endif
1867 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1868     uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_epoch);          /*!< DTLS epoch for incoming records  */
1869     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(next_record_offset);  /*!< offset of the next record in datagram
1870                                                     (equal to in_left if none)       */
1871 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1872 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
1873     uint64_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_window_top);     /*!< last validated record seq_num    */
1874     uint64_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_window);         /*!< bitmask for replay detection     */
1875 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY */
1876 
1877     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_hslen);            /*!< current handshake message length,
1878                                                     including the handshake header   */
1879     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(nb_zero);                /*!< # of 0-length encrypted messages */
1880 
1881     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(keep_current_message);   /*!< drop or reuse current message
1882                                                     on next call to record layer? */
1883 
1884     /* The following three variables indicate if and, if yes,
1885      * what kind of alert is pending to be sent.
1886      */
1887     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(send_alert);   /*!< Determines if a fatal alert
1888                                                     should be sent. Values:
1889                                                     - \c 0 , no alert is to be sent.
1890                                                     - \c 1 , alert is to be sent. */
1891     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alert_type);   /*!< Type of alert if send_alert
1892                                                     != 0 */
1893     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alert_reason);           /*!< The error code to be returned
1894                                                     to the user once the fatal alert
1895                                                     has been sent. */
1896 
1897 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1898     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(disable_datagram_packing);  /*!< Disable packing multiple records
1899                                                          *   within a single datagram.  */
1900 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1901 
1902 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1903 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1904     /*
1905      * One of:
1906      * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_NO_DISCARD
1907      * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_TRY_TO_DEPROTECT_AND_DISCARD
1908      * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISCARD
1909      */
1910     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(discard_early_data_record);
1911 #endif
1912     uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(total_early_data_size); /*!< Number of received/written early data bytes */
1913 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
1914 
1915     /*
1916      * Record layer (outgoing data)
1917      */
1918     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_buf);     /*!< output buffer                    */
1919     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_ctr);     /*!< 64-bit outgoing message counter  */
1920     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_hdr);     /*!< start of record header           */
1921 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1922     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_cid);     /*!< The start of the CID;
1923                                                   *   (the end is marked by in_len).   */
1924 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1925     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_len);     /*!< two-bytes message length field   */
1926     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_iv);      /*!< ivlen-byte IV                    */
1927     unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msg);     /*!< message contents (out_iv+ivlen)  */
1928 
1929     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msgtype);            /*!< record header: message type      */
1930     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msglen);          /*!< record header: message length    */
1931     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_left);            /*!< amount of data not yet written   */
1932 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_VARIABLE_BUFFER_LENGTH)
1933     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_buf_len);         /*!< length of output buffer          */
1934 #endif
1935 
1936     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cur_out_ctr)[MBEDTLS_SSL_SEQUENCE_NUMBER_LEN]; /*!<  Outgoing record sequence  number. */
1937 
1938 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1939     uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mtu);               /*!< path mtu, used to fragment outgoing messages */
1940 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1941 
1942     /*
1943      * User settings
1944      */
1945 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1946     /** Expected peer CN for verification.
1947      *
1948      * Also used on clients for SNI,
1949      * and for TLS 1.3 session resumption using tickets.
1950      *
1951      * The value of this field can be:
1952      * - \p NULL in a newly initialized or reset context.
1953      * - A heap-allocated copy of the last value passed to
1954      *   mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname(), if the last call had a non-null
1955      *  \p hostname argument.
1956      * - A special value to indicate that mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname()
1957      *   was called with \p NULL (as opposed to never having been called).
1958      *   See `mbedtls_ssl_get_hostname_pointer()` in `ssl_tls.c`.
1959      *
1960      * If this field contains the value \p NULL and the configuration option
1961      * #MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_ALLOW_WEAK_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
1962      * is unset, on a TLS client, attempting to verify a server certificate
1963      * results in the error
1964      * #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME.
1965      *
1966      * If this field contains the special value described above, or if
1967      * the value is \p NULL and the configuration option
1968      * #MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_ALLOW_WEAK_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
1969      * is set, then the peer name verification is skipped, which may be
1970      * insecure, especially on a client. Furthermore, on a client, the
1971      * server_name extension is not sent, and the server name is ignored
1972      * in TLS 1.3 session resumption using tickets.
1973      */
1974     char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);
1975 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1976 
1977 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
1978     const char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alpn_chosen);    /*!<  negotiated protocol                   */
1979 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN */
1980 
1981 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1982     /*
1983      * use_srtp extension
1984      */
1985     mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_info);
1986 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1987 
1988     /*
1989      * Information for DTLS hello verify
1990      */
1991 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1992     unsigned char  *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cli_id);         /*!<  transport-level ID of the client  */
1993     size_t          MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cli_id_len);     /*!<  length of cli_id                  */
1994 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1995 
1996     /*
1997      * Secure renegotiation
1998      */
1999     /* needed to know when to send extension on server */
2000     int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(secure_renegotiation);           /*!<  does peer support legacy or
2001                                                             secure renegotiation           */
2002 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
2003     size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(verify_data_len);             /*!<  length of verify data stored   */
2004     char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_verify_data)[MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN]; /*!<  previous handshake verify data */
2005     char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_verify_data)[MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN]; /*!<  previous handshake verify data */
2006 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
2007 
2008 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
2009     /* CID configuration to use in subsequent handshakes. */
2010 
2011     /*! The next incoming CID, chosen by the user and applying to
2012      *  all subsequent handshakes. This may be different from the
2013      *  CID currently used in case the user has re-configured the CID
2014      *  after an initial handshake. */
2015     unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_cid)[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX];
2016     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_cid_len);   /*!< The length of \c own_cid. */
2017     uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(negotiate_cid); /*!< This indicates whether the CID extension should
2018                                              *   be negotiated in the next handshake or not.
2019                                              *   Possible values are #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED
2020                                              *   and #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED. */
2021 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
2022 
2023     /** Callback to export key block and master secret                      */
2024     mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_export_keys);
2025     void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_export_keys);            /*!< context for key export callback    */
2026 
2027     /** User data pointer or handle.
2028      *
2029      * The library sets this to \p 0 when creating a context and does not
2030      * access it afterwards.
2031      *
2032      * \warning Serializing and restoring an SSL context with
2033      *          mbedtls_ssl_context_save() and mbedtls_ssl_context_load()
2034      *          does not currently restore the user data.
2035      */
2036     mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data);
2037 };
2038 
2039 /**
2040  * \brief               Return the name of the ciphersuite associated with the
2041  *                      given ID
2042  *
2043  * \param ciphersuite_id SSL ciphersuite ID
2044  *
2045  * \return              a string containing the ciphersuite name
2046  */
2047 const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_name(const int ciphersuite_id);
2048 
2049 /**
2050  * \brief               Return the ID of the ciphersuite associated with the
2051  *                      given name
2052  *
2053  * \param ciphersuite_name SSL ciphersuite name
2054  *
2055  * \return              the ID with the ciphersuite or 0 if not found
2056  */
2057 int mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_id(const char *ciphersuite_name);
2058 
2059 /**
2060  * \brief          Initialize an SSL context
2061  *                 Just makes the context ready for mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
2062  *                 mbedtls_ssl_free()
2063  *
2064  * \param ssl      SSL context
2065  */
2066 void mbedtls_ssl_init(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
2067 
2068 /**
2069  * \brief          Set up an SSL context for use
2070  *
2071  * \note           No copy of the configuration context is made, it can be
2072  *                 shared by many mbedtls_ssl_context structures.
2073  *
2074  * \warning        The conf structure will be accessed during the session.
2075  *                 It must not be modified or freed as long as the session
2076  *                 is active.
2077  *
2078  * \warning        This function must be called exactly once per context.
2079  *                 Calling mbedtls_ssl_setup again is not supported, even
2080  *                 if no session is active.
2081  *
2082  * \warning        After setting up a client context, if certificate-based
2083  *                 authentication is enabled, you should call
2084  *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname() to specifiy the expected
2085  *                 name of the server. Without this, in most scenarios,
2086  *                 the TLS connection is insecure. See
2087  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
2088  *                 for more information.
2089  *
2090  * \note           If #MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO is enabled, the PSA crypto
2091  *                 subsystem must have been initialized by calling
2092  *                 psa_crypto_init() before calling this function.
2093  *
2094  * \param ssl      SSL context
2095  * \param conf     SSL configuration to use
2096  *
2097  * \return         0 if successful, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if
2098  *                 memory allocation failed
2099  */
2100 int mbedtls_ssl_setup(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2101                       const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
2102 
2103 /**
2104  * \brief          Reset an already initialized SSL context for re-use
2105  *                 while retaining application-set variables, function
2106  *                 pointers and data.
2107  *
2108  * \param ssl      SSL context
2109  * \return         0 if successful, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED or
2110                    MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FAILED
2111  */
2112 int mbedtls_ssl_session_reset(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
2113 
2114 /**
2115  * \brief          Set the current endpoint type
2116  *
2117  * \param conf     SSL configuration
2118  * \param endpoint must be MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
2119  */
2120 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_endpoint(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int endpoint);
2121 
2122 /**
2123  * \brief          Get the current endpoint type
2124  *
2125  * \param conf     SSL configuration
2126  *
2127  * \return         Endpoint type, either MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT
2128  *                 or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
2129  */
mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_endpoint(const mbedtls_ssl_config * conf)2130 static inline int mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_endpoint(const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2131 {
2132     return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);
2133 }
2134 
2135 /**
2136  * \brief           Set the transport type (TLS or DTLS).
2137  *                  Default: TLS
2138  *
2139  * \note            For DTLS, you must either provide a recv callback that
2140  *                  doesn't block, or one that handles timeouts, see
2141  *                  \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(). You also need to provide timer
2142  *                  callbacks with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb().
2143  *
2144  * \param conf      SSL configuration
2145  * \param transport transport type:
2146  *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM for TLS,
2147  *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM for DTLS.
2148  */
2149 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_transport(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int transport);
2150 
2151 /**
2152  * \brief          Set the certificate verification mode
2153  *                 Default: NONE on server, REQUIRED on client
2154  *
2155  * \param conf     SSL configuration
2156  * \param authmode can be:
2157  *
2158  *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE:      peer certificate is not checked
2159  *                        (default on server)
2160  *                        (insecure on client)
2161  *
2162  *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL:  peer certificate is checked, however the
2163  *                        handshake continues even if verification failed;
2164  *                        mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result() can be called after the
2165  *                        handshake is complete.
2166  *
2167  *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED:  peer *must* present a valid certificate,
2168  *                        handshake is aborted if verification failed.
2169  *                        (default on client)
2170  *
2171  * \note On client, MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED is the recommended mode.
2172  * With MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL, the user needs to call mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result() at
2173  * the right time(s), which may not be obvious, while REQUIRED always perform
2174  * the verification as soon as possible. For example, REQUIRED was protecting
2175  * against the "triple handshake" attack even before it was found.
2176  */
2177 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_authmode(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int authmode);
2178 
2179 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
2180 /**
2181  * \brief    Set the early data mode
2182  *           Default: disabled on server and client
2183  *
2184  * \param conf   The SSL configuration to use.
2185  * \param early_data_enabled can be:
2186  *
2187  *  MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED:
2188  *  Early data functionality is disabled. This is the default on client and
2189  *  server.
2190  *
2191  *  MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED:
2192  *  Early data functionality is enabled and may be negotiated in the handshake.
2193  *  Application using early data functionality needs to be aware that the
2194  *  security properties for early data (also refered to as 0-RTT data) are
2195  *  weaker than those for other kinds of TLS data. See the documentation of
2196  *  mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data() and mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data() for more
2197  *  information.
2198  *  When early data functionality is enabled on server and only in that case,
2199  *  the call to one of the APIs that trigger or resume an handshake sequence,
2200  *  namely mbedtls_ssl_handshake(), mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(),
2201  *  mbedtls_ssl_read() or mbedtls_ssl_write() may return with the error code
2202  *  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA indicating that some early data have
2203  *  been received. To read the early data, call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
2204  *  before calling the original function again.
2205  */
2206 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2207                                  int early_data_enabled);
2208 
2209 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2210 /**
2211  * \brief Set the maximum amount of 0-RTT data in bytes
2212  *        Default:  #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE
2213  *
2214  *        This function sets the value of the max_early_data_size
2215  *        field of the early data indication extension included in
2216  *        the NewSessionTicket messages that the server may send.
2217  *
2218  *        The value defines the maximum amount of 0-RTT data
2219  *        in bytes that a client will be allowed to send when using
2220  *        one of the tickets defined by the NewSessionTicket messages.
2221  *
2222  * \note When resuming a session using a ticket, if the server receives more
2223  *       early data than allowed for the ticket, it terminates the connection.
2224  *       The maximum amount of 0-RTT data should thus be large enough
2225  *       to allow a minimum of early data to be exchanged.
2226  *
2227  * \param[in] conf                  The SSL configuration to use.
2228  * \param[in] max_early_data_size   The maximum amount of 0-RTT data.
2229  *
2230  * \warning This interface DOES NOT influence/limit the amount of early data
2231  *          that can be received through previously created and issued tickets,
2232  *          which clients may have stored.
2233  */
2234 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_early_data_size(
2235     mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t max_early_data_size);
2236 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2237 
2238 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
2239 
2240 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
2241 /**
2242  * \brief          Set the verification callback (Optional).
2243  *
2244  *                 If set, the provided verify callback is called for each
2245  *                 certificate in the peer's CRT chain, including the trusted
2246  *                 root. For more information, please see the documentation of
2247  *                 \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify().
2248  *
2249  * \note           For per context callbacks and contexts, please use
2250  *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_verify() instead.
2251  *
2252  * \param conf     The SSL configuration to use.
2253  * \param f_vrfy   The verification callback to use during CRT verification.
2254  * \param p_vrfy   The opaque context to be passed to the callback.
2255  */
2256 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2257                              int (*f_vrfy)(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *),
2258                              void *p_vrfy);
2259 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
2260 
2261 /**
2262  * \brief          Set the random number generator callback
2263  *
2264  * \note           The callback with its parameter must remain valid as
2265  *                 long as there is an SSL context that uses the
2266  *                 SSL configuration.
2267  *
2268  * \param conf     SSL configuration
2269  * \param f_rng    RNG function (mandatory)
2270  * \param p_rng    RNG parameter
2271  */
2272 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_rng(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2273                           mbedtls_f_rng_t *f_rng,
2274                           void *p_rng);
2275 
2276 /**
2277  * \brief          Set the debug callback
2278  *
2279  *                 The callback has the following argument:
2280  *                 void *           opaque context for the callback
2281  *                 int              debug level
2282  *                 const char *     file name
2283  *                 int              line number
2284  *                 const char *     message
2285  *
2286  * \param conf     SSL configuration
2287  * \param f_dbg    debug function
2288  * \param p_dbg    debug parameter
2289  */
2290 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dbg(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2291                           void (*f_dbg)(void *, int, const char *, int, const char *),
2292                           void  *p_dbg);
2293 
2294 /**
2295  * \brief          Return the SSL configuration structure associated
2296  *                 with the given SSL context.
2297  *
2298  * \note           The pointer returned by this function is guaranteed to
2299  *                 remain valid until the context is freed.
2300  *
2301  * \param ssl      The SSL context to query.
2302  * \return         Pointer to the SSL configuration associated with \p ssl.
2303  */
mbedtls_ssl_context_get_config(const mbedtls_ssl_context * ssl)2304 static inline const mbedtls_ssl_config *mbedtls_ssl_context_get_config(
2305     const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2306 {
2307     return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(conf);
2308 }
2309 
2310 /**
2311  * \brief          Set the underlying BIO callbacks for write, read and
2312  *                 read-with-timeout.
2313  *
2314  * \param ssl      SSL context
2315  * \param p_bio    parameter (context) shared by BIO callbacks
2316  * \param f_send   write callback
2317  * \param f_recv   read callback
2318  * \param f_recv_timeout blocking read callback with timeout.
2319  *
2320  * \note           One of f_recv or f_recv_timeout can be NULL, in which case
2321  *                 the other is used. If both are non-NULL, f_recv_timeout is
2322  *                 used and f_recv is ignored (as if it were NULL).
2323  *
2324  * \note           The two most common use cases are:
2325  *                 - non-blocking I/O, f_recv != NULL, f_recv_timeout == NULL
2326  *                 - blocking I/O, f_recv == NULL, f_recv_timeout != NULL
2327  *
2328  * \note           For DTLS, you need to provide either a non-NULL
2329  *                 f_recv_timeout callback, or a f_recv that doesn't block.
2330  *
2331  * \note           See the documentations of \c mbedtls_ssl_send_t,
2332  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_recv_t and \c mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t for
2333  *                 the conventions those callbacks must follow.
2334  *
2335  * \note           On some platforms, net_sockets.c provides
2336  *                 \c mbedtls_net_send(), \c mbedtls_net_recv() and
2337  *                 \c mbedtls_net_recv_timeout() that are suitable to be used
2338  *                 here.
2339  */
2340 void mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2341                          void *p_bio,
2342                          mbedtls_ssl_send_t *f_send,
2343                          mbedtls_ssl_recv_t *f_recv,
2344                          mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t *f_recv_timeout);
2345 
2346 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
2347 
2348 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
2349 
2350 
2351 /**
2352  * \brief             Configure the use of the Connection ID (CID)
2353  *                    extension in the next handshake.
2354  *
2355  *                    Reference: RFC 9146 (or draft-ietf-tls-dtls-connection-id-05
2356  *                    https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-tls-dtls-connection-id-05
2357  *                    for legacy version)
2358  *
2359  *                    The DTLS CID extension allows the reliable association of
2360  *                    DTLS records to DTLS connections across changes in the
2361  *                    underlying transport (changed IP and Port metadata) by
2362  *                    adding explicit connection identifiers (CIDs) to the
2363  *                    headers of encrypted DTLS records. The desired CIDs are
2364  *                    configured by the application layer and are exchanged in
2365  *                    new `ClientHello` / `ServerHello` extensions during the
2366  *                    handshake, where each side indicates the CID it wants the
2367  *                    peer to use when writing encrypted messages. The CIDs are
2368  *                    put to use once records get encrypted: the stack discards
2369  *                    any incoming records that don't include the configured CID
2370  *                    in their header, and adds the peer's requested CID to the
2371  *                    headers of outgoing messages.
2372  *
2373  *                    This API enables or disables the use of the CID extension
2374  *                    in the next handshake and sets the value of the CID to
2375  *                    be used for incoming messages.
2376  *
2377  * \param ssl         The SSL context to configure. This must be initialized.
2378  * \param enable      This value determines whether the CID extension should
2379  *                    be used or not. Possible values are:
2380  *                    - MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED to enable the use of the CID.
2381  *                    - MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED (default) to disable the use
2382  *                      of the CID.
2383  * \param own_cid     The address of the readable buffer holding the CID we want
2384  *                    the peer to use when sending encrypted messages to us.
2385  *                    This may be \c NULL if \p own_cid_len is \c 0.
2386  *                    This parameter is unused if \p enable is set to
2387  *                    MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2388  * \param own_cid_len The length of \p own_cid.
2389  *                    This parameter is unused if \p enable is set to
2390  *                    MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2391  *
2392  * \note              The value of \p own_cid_len must match the value of the
2393  *                    \c len parameter passed to mbedtls_ssl_conf_cid()
2394  *                    when configuring the ::mbedtls_ssl_config that \p ssl
2395  *                    is bound to.
2396  *
2397  * \note              This CID configuration applies to subsequent handshakes
2398  *                    performed on the SSL context \p ssl, but does not trigger
2399  *                    one. You still have to call `mbedtls_ssl_handshake()`
2400  *                    (for the initial handshake) or `mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate()`
2401  *                    (for a renegotiation handshake) explicitly after a
2402  *                    successful call to this function to run the handshake.
2403  *
2404  * \note              This call cannot guarantee that the use of the CID
2405  *                    will be successfully negotiated in the next handshake,
2406  *                    because the peer might not support it. Specifically:
2407  *                    - On the Client, enabling the use of the CID through
2408  *                      this call implies that the `ClientHello` in the next
2409  *                      handshake will include the CID extension, thereby
2410  *                      offering the use of the CID to the server. Only if
2411  *                      the `ServerHello` contains the CID extension, too,
2412  *                      the CID extension will actually be put to use.
2413  *                    - On the Server, enabling the use of the CID through
2414  *                      this call implies that the server will look for
2415  *                      the CID extension in a `ClientHello` from the client,
2416  *                      and, if present, reply with a CID extension in its
2417  *                      `ServerHello`.
2418  *
2419  * \note              To check whether the use of the CID was negotiated
2420  *                    after the subsequent handshake has completed, please
2421  *                    use the API mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cid().
2422  *
2423  * \warning           If the use of the CID extension is enabled in this call
2424  *                    and the subsequent handshake negotiates its use, Mbed TLS
2425  *                    will silently drop every packet whose CID does not match
2426  *                    the CID configured in \p own_cid. It is the responsibility
2427  *                    of the user to adapt the underlying transport to take care
2428  *                    of CID-based demultiplexing before handing datagrams to
2429  *                    Mbed TLS.
2430  *
2431  * \return            \c 0 on success. In this case, the CID configuration
2432  *                    applies to the next handshake.
2433  * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2434  */
2435 int mbedtls_ssl_set_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2436                         int enable,
2437                         unsigned char const *own_cid,
2438                         size_t own_cid_len);
2439 
2440 /**
2441  * \brief              Get information about our request for usage of the CID
2442  *                     extension in the current connection.
2443  *
2444  * \param ssl          The SSL context to query.
2445  * \param enabled      The address at which to store whether the CID extension
2446  *                     is requested to be used or not. If the CID is
2447  *                     requested, `*enabled` is set to
2448  *                     MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED; otherwise, it is set to
2449  *                     MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2450  * \param own_cid      The address of the buffer in which to store our own
2451  *                     CID (if the CID extension is requested). This may be
2452  *                     \c NULL in case the value of our CID isn't needed. If
2453  *                     it is not \c NULL, \p own_cid_len must not be \c NULL.
2454  * \param own_cid_len  The address at which to store the size of our own CID
2455  *                     (if the CID extension is requested). This is also the
2456  *                     number of Bytes in \p own_cid that have been written.
2457  *                     This may be \c NULL in case the length of our own CID
2458  *                     isn't needed. If it is \c NULL, \p own_cid must be
2459  *                     \c NULL, too.
2460  *
2461  *\note                If we are requesting an empty CID this function sets
2462  *                     `*enabled` to #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED (the rationale
2463  *                     for this is that the resulting outcome is the
2464  *                     same as if the CID extensions wasn't requested).
2465  *
2466  * \return            \c 0 on success.
2467  * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2468  */
2469 int mbedtls_ssl_get_own_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2470                             int *enabled,
2471                             unsigned char own_cid[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX],
2472                             size_t *own_cid_len);
2473 
2474 /**
2475  * \brief              Get information about the use of the CID extension
2476  *                     in the current connection.
2477  *
2478  * \param ssl          The SSL context to query.
2479  * \param enabled      The address at which to store whether the CID extension
2480  *                     is currently in use or not. If the CID is in use,
2481  *                     `*enabled` is set to MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED;
2482  *                     otherwise, it is set to MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2483  * \param peer_cid     The address of the buffer in which to store the CID
2484  *                     chosen by the peer (if the CID extension is used).
2485  *                     This may be \c NULL in case the value of peer CID
2486  *                     isn't needed. If it is not \c NULL, \p peer_cid_len
2487  *                     must not be \c NULL.
2488  * \param peer_cid_len The address at which to store the size of the CID
2489  *                     chosen by the peer (if the CID extension is used).
2490  *                     This is also the number of Bytes in \p peer_cid that
2491  *                     have been written.
2492  *                     This may be \c NULL in case the length of the peer CID
2493  *                     isn't needed. If it is \c NULL, \p peer_cid must be
2494  *                     \c NULL, too.
2495  *
2496  * \note               This applies to the state of the CID negotiated in
2497  *                     the last complete handshake. If a handshake is in
2498  *                     progress, this function will attempt to complete
2499  *                     the handshake first.
2500  *
2501  * \note               If CID extensions have been exchanged but both client
2502  *                     and server chose to use an empty CID, this function
2503  *                     sets `*enabled` to #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED
2504  *                     (the rationale for this is that the resulting
2505  *                     communication is the same as if the CID extensions
2506  *                     hadn't been used).
2507  *
2508  * \return            \c 0 on success.
2509  * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2510  */
2511 int mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2512                              int *enabled,
2513                              unsigned char peer_cid[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX],
2514                              size_t *peer_cid_len);
2515 
2516 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
2517 
2518 /**
2519  * \brief          Set the Maximum Transport Unit (MTU).
2520  *                 Special value: 0 means unset (no limit).
2521  *                 This represents the maximum size of a datagram payload
2522  *                 handled by the transport layer (usually UDP) as determined
2523  *                 by the network link and stack. In practice, this controls
2524  *                 the maximum size datagram the DTLS layer will pass to the
2525  *                 \c f_send() callback set using \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio().
2526  *
2527  * \note           The limit on datagram size is converted to a limit on
2528  *                 record payload by subtracting the current overhead of
2529  *                 encapsulation and encryption/authentication if any.
2530  *
2531  * \note           This can be called at any point during the connection, for
2532  *                 example when a Path Maximum Transfer Unit (PMTU)
2533  *                 estimate becomes available from other sources,
2534  *                 such as lower (or higher) protocol layers.
2535  *
2536  * \note           This setting only controls the size of the packets we send,
2537  *                 and does not restrict the size of the datagrams we're
2538  *                 willing to receive. Client-side, you can request the
2539  *                 server to use smaller records with \c
2540  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_frag_len().
2541  *
2542  * \note           If both a MTU and a maximum fragment length have been
2543  *                 configured (or negotiated with the peer), the resulting
2544  *                 lower limit on record payload (see first note) is used.
2545  *
2546  * \note           This can only be used to decrease the maximum size
2547  *                 of datagrams (hence records, see first note) sent. It
2548  *                 cannot be used to increase the maximum size of records over
2549  *                 the limit set by #MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN.
2550  *
2551  * \note           Values lower than the current record layer expansion will
2552  *                 result in an error when trying to send data.
2553  *
2554  * \param ssl      SSL context
2555  * \param mtu      Value of the path MTU in bytes
2556  */
2557 void mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, uint16_t mtu);
2558 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
2559 
2560 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
2561 /**
2562  * \brief          Set a connection-specific verification callback (optional).
2563  *
2564  *                 If set, the provided verify callback is called for each
2565  *                 certificate in the peer's CRT chain, including the trusted
2566  *                 root. For more information, please see the documentation of
2567  *                 \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify().
2568  *
2569  * \note           This call is analogous to mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() but
2570  *                 binds the verification callback and context to an SSL context
2571  *                 as opposed to an SSL configuration.
2572  *                 If mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() and mbedtls_ssl_set_verify()
2573  *                 are both used, mbedtls_ssl_set_verify() takes precedence.
2574  *
2575  * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
2576  * \param f_vrfy   The verification callback to use during CRT verification.
2577  * \param p_vrfy   The opaque context to be passed to the callback.
2578  */
2579 void mbedtls_ssl_set_verify(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2580                             int (*f_vrfy)(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *),
2581                             void *p_vrfy);
2582 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
2583 
2584 /**
2585  * \brief          Set the timeout period for mbedtls_ssl_read()
2586  *                 (Default: no timeout.)
2587  *
2588  * \param conf     SSL configuration context
2589  * \param timeout  Timeout value in milliseconds.
2590  *                 Use 0 for no timeout (default).
2591  *
2592  * \note           With blocking I/O, this will only work if a non-NULL
2593  *                 \c f_recv_timeout was set with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio().
2594  *                 With non-blocking I/O, this will only work if timer
2595  *                 callbacks were set with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb().
2596  *
2597  * \note           With non-blocking I/O, you may also skip this function
2598  *                 altogether and handle timeouts at the application layer.
2599  */
2600 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_read_timeout(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t timeout);
2601 
2602 /**
2603  * \brief          Check whether a buffer contains a valid and authentic record
2604  *                 that has not been seen before. (DTLS only).
2605  *
2606  *                 This function does not change the user-visible state
2607  *                 of the SSL context. Its sole purpose is to provide
2608  *                 an indication of the legitimacy of an incoming record.
2609  *
2610  *                 This can be useful e.g. in distributed server environments
2611  *                 using the DTLS Connection ID feature, in which connections
2612  *                 might need to be passed between service instances on a change
2613  *                 of peer address, but where such disruptive operations should
2614  *                 only happen after the validity of incoming records has been
2615  *                 confirmed.
2616  *
2617  * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
2618  * \param buf      The address of the buffer holding the record to be checked.
2619  *                 This must be a read/write buffer of length \p buflen Bytes.
2620  * \param buflen   The length of \p buf in Bytes.
2621  *
2622  * \note           This routine only checks whether the provided buffer begins
2623  *                 with a valid and authentic record that has not been seen
2624  *                 before, but does not check potential data following the
2625  *                 initial record. In particular, it is possible to pass DTLS
2626  *                 datagrams containing multiple records, in which case only
2627  *                 the first record is checked.
2628  *
2629  * \note           This function modifies the input buffer \p buf. If you need
2630  *                 to preserve the original record, you have to maintain a copy.
2631  *
2632  * \return         \c 0 if the record is valid and authentic and has not been
2633  *                 seen before.
2634  * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC if the check completed
2635  *                 successfully but the record was found to be not authentic.
2636  * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_RECORD if the check completed
2637  *                 successfully but the record was found to be invalid for
2638  *                 a reason different from authenticity checking.
2639  * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_RECORD if the check completed
2640  *                 successfully but the record was found to be unexpected
2641  *                 in the state of the SSL context, including replayed records.
2642  * \return         Another negative error code on different kinds of failure.
2643  *                 In this case, the SSL context becomes unusable and needs
2644  *                 to be freed or reset before reuse.
2645  */
2646 int mbedtls_ssl_check_record(mbedtls_ssl_context const *ssl,
2647                              unsigned char *buf,
2648                              size_t buflen);
2649 
2650 /**
2651  * \brief          Set the timer callbacks (Mandatory for DTLS.)
2652  *
2653  * \param ssl      SSL context
2654  * \param p_timer  parameter (context) shared by timer callbacks
2655  * \param f_set_timer   set timer callback
2656  * \param f_get_timer   get timer callback. Must return:
2657  *
2658  * \note           See the documentation of \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t and
2659  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t for the conventions this pair of
2660  *                 callbacks must follow.
2661  *
2662  * \note           On some platforms, timing.c provides
2663  *                 \c mbedtls_timing_set_delay() and
2664  *                 \c mbedtls_timing_get_delay() that are suitable for using
2665  *                 here, except if using an event-driven style.
2666  *
2667  * \note           See also the "DTLS tutorial" article in our knowledge base.
2668  *                 https://mbed-tls.readthedocs.io/en/latest/kb/how-to/dtls-tutorial
2669  */
2670 void mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2671                               void *p_timer,
2672                               mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t *f_set_timer,
2673                               mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t *f_get_timer);
2674 
2675 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2676 /**
2677  * \brief           Set the certificate selection callback (server-side only).
2678  *
2679  *                  If set, the callback is always called for each handshake,
2680  *                  after `ClientHello` processing has finished.
2681  *
2682  * \param conf      The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
2683  * \param f_cert_cb The callback for selecting server certificate after
2684  *                  `ClientHello` processing has finished.
2685  */
mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config * conf,mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t f_cert_cb)2686 static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2687                                             mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t f_cert_cb)
2688 {
2689     conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cert_cb) = f_cert_cb;
2690 }
2691 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2692 
2693 /**
2694  * \brief           Callback type: generate and write session ticket
2695  *
2696  * \note            This describes what a callback implementation should do.
2697  *                  This callback should generate an encrypted and
2698  *                  authenticated ticket for the session and write it to the
2699  *                  output buffer. Here, ticket means the opaque ticket part
2700  *                  of the NewSessionTicket structure of RFC 5077.
2701  *
2702  * \param p_ticket  Context for the callback
2703  * \param session   SSL session to be written in the ticket
2704  * \param start     Start of the output buffer
2705  * \param end       End of the output buffer
2706  * \param tlen      On exit, holds the length written
2707  * \param lifetime  On exit, holds the lifetime of the ticket in seconds
2708  *
2709  * \return          0 if successful, or
2710  *                  a specific MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX code.
2711  */
2712 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t(void *p_ticket,
2713                                        const mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
2714                                        unsigned char *start,
2715                                        const unsigned char *end,
2716                                        size_t *tlen,
2717                                        uint32_t *lifetime);
2718 
2719 /**
2720  * \brief           Callback type: parse and load session ticket
2721  *
2722  * \note            This describes what a callback implementation should do.
2723  *                  This callback should parse a session ticket as generated
2724  *                  by the corresponding mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t function,
2725  *                  and, if the ticket is authentic and valid, load the
2726  *                  session.
2727  *
2728  * \note            The implementation is allowed to modify the first len
2729  *                  bytes of the input buffer, eg to use it as a temporary
2730  *                  area for the decrypted ticket contents.
2731  *
2732  * \param p_ticket  Context for the callback
2733  * \param session   SSL session to be loaded
2734  * \param buf       Start of the buffer containing the ticket
2735  * \param len       Length of the ticket.
2736  *
2737  * \return          0 if successful, or
2738  *                  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC if not authentic, or
2739  *                  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_SESSION_TICKET_EXPIRED if expired, or
2740  *                  any other non-zero code for other failures.
2741  */
2742 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_ticket_parse_t(void *p_ticket,
2743                                        mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
2744                                        unsigned char *buf,
2745                                        size_t len);
2746 
2747 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2748 /**
2749  * \brief           Configure SSL session ticket callbacks (server only).
2750  *                  (Default: none.)
2751  *
2752  * \note            On server, session tickets are enabled by providing
2753  *                  non-NULL callbacks.
2754  *
2755  * \note            On client, use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets().
2756  *
2757  * \param conf      SSL configuration context
2758  * \param f_ticket_write    Callback for writing a ticket
2759  * \param f_ticket_parse    Callback for parsing a ticket
2760  * \param p_ticket          Context shared by the two callbacks
2761  */
2762 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2763                                          mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t *f_ticket_write,
2764                                          mbedtls_ssl_ticket_parse_t *f_ticket_parse,
2765                                          void *p_ticket);
2766 
2767 #if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
2768 /**
2769  * \brief Get the creation time of a session ticket.
2770  *
2771  * \note See the documentation of \c ticket_creation_time for information about
2772  *       the intended usage of this function.
2773  *
2774  * \param session  SSL session
2775  * \param ticket_creation_time  On exit, holds the ticket creation time in
2776  *                              milliseconds.
2777  *
2778  * \return         0 on success,
2779  *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if an input is not valid.
2780  */
mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ticket_creation_time(mbedtls_ssl_session * session,mbedtls_ms_time_t * ticket_creation_time)2781 static inline int mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ticket_creation_time(
2782     mbedtls_ssl_session *session, mbedtls_ms_time_t *ticket_creation_time)
2783 {
2784     if (session == NULL || ticket_creation_time == NULL ||
2785         session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint) != MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER) {
2786         return MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA;
2787     }
2788 
2789     *ticket_creation_time = session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_creation_time);
2790 
2791     return 0;
2792 }
2793 #endif /* MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME */
2794 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2795 
2796 /**
2797  * \brief          Get the session-id buffer.
2798  *
2799  * \param session  SSL session.
2800  *
2801  * \return         The address of the session-id buffer.
2802  */
mbedtls_ssl_session_get_id(const mbedtls_ssl_session * session)2803 static inline unsigned const char (*mbedtls_ssl_session_get_id(const mbedtls_ssl_session *
2804                                                                session))[32]
2805 {
2806     return &session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id);
2807 }
2808 
2809 /**
2810  * \brief          Get the size of the session-id.
2811  *
2812  * \param session  SSL session.
2813  *
2814  * \return         size_t size of session-id buffer.
2815  */
mbedtls_ssl_session_get_id_len(const mbedtls_ssl_session * session)2816 static inline size_t mbedtls_ssl_session_get_id_len(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
2817 {
2818     return session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id_len);
2819 }
2820 
2821 /**
2822  * \brief          Get the ciphersuite-id.
2823  *
2824  * \param session  SSL session.
2825  *
2826  * \return         int represetation for ciphersuite.
2827  */
mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ciphersuite_id(const mbedtls_ssl_session * session)2828 static inline int mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ciphersuite_id(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
2829 {
2830     return session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite);
2831 }
2832 
2833 /**
2834  * \brief   Configure a key export callback.
2835  *          (Default: none.)
2836  *
2837  *          This API can be used for two purposes:
2838  *          - Debugging: Use this API to e.g. generate an NSSKeylog
2839  *            file and use it to inspect encrypted traffic in tools
2840  *            such as Wireshark.
2841  *          - Application-specific export: Use this API to implement
2842  *            key exporters, e.g. for EAP-TLS or DTLS-SRTP.
2843  *
2844  *
2845  * \param ssl            The SSL context to which the export
2846  *                       callback should be attached.
2847  * \param f_export_keys  The callback for the key export.
2848  * \param p_export_keys  The opaque context pointer to be passed to the
2849  *                       callback \p f_export_keys.
2850  */
2851 void mbedtls_ssl_set_export_keys_cb(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2852                                     mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t *f_export_keys,
2853                                     void *p_export_keys);
2854 
2855 /** \brief Set the user data in an SSL configuration to a pointer.
2856  *
2857  * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p().
2858  *
2859  * \note The library stores \c p without accessing it. It is the responsibility
2860  *       of the caller to ensure that the pointer remains valid.
2861  *
2862  * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2863  * \param p              The new value of the user data.
2864  */
mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p(mbedtls_ssl_config * conf,void * p)2865 static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p(
2866     mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2867     void *p)
2868 {
2869     conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p = p;
2870 }
2871 
2872 /** \brief Set the user data in an SSL configuration to an integer.
2873  *
2874  * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n().
2875  *
2876  * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2877  * \param n              The new value of the user data.
2878  */
mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n(mbedtls_ssl_config * conf,uintptr_t n)2879 static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n(
2880     mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2881     uintptr_t n)
2882 {
2883     conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n = n;
2884 }
2885 
2886 /** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL configuration as a pointer.
2887  *
2888  * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p(), or
2889  * \c NULL if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p() has not previously been
2890  * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n() has
2891  * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p().
2892  *
2893  * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2894  * \return               The current value of the user data.
2895  */
mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p(mbedtls_ssl_config * conf)2896 static inline void *mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p(
2897     mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2898 {
2899     return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p;
2900 }
2901 
2902 /** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL configuration as an integer.
2903  *
2904  * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n(), or
2905  * \c 0 if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n() has not previously been
2906  * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p() has
2907  * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n().
2908  *
2909  * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2910  * \return               The current value of the user data.
2911  */
mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n(mbedtls_ssl_config * conf)2912 static inline uintptr_t mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n(
2913     mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2914 {
2915     return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n;
2916 }
2917 
2918 /** \brief Set the user data in an SSL context to a pointer.
2919  *
2920  * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p().
2921  *
2922  * \note The library stores \c p without accessing it. It is the responsibility
2923  *       of the caller to ensure that the pointer remains valid.
2924  *
2925  * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2926  * \param p              The new value of the user data.
2927  */
mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p(mbedtls_ssl_context * ssl,void * p)2928 static inline void mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p(
2929     mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2930     void *p)
2931 {
2932     ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p = p;
2933 }
2934 
2935 /** \brief Set the user data in an SSL context to an integer.
2936  *
2937  * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n().
2938  *
2939  * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2940  * \param n              The new value of the user data.
2941  */
mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n(mbedtls_ssl_context * ssl,uintptr_t n)2942 static inline void mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n(
2943     mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2944     uintptr_t n)
2945 {
2946     ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n = n;
2947 }
2948 
2949 /** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL context as a pointer.
2950  *
2951  * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p(), or
2952  * \c NULL if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() has not previously been
2953  * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() has
2954  * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p().
2955  *
2956  * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2957  * \return               The current value of the user data.
2958  */
mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p(mbedtls_ssl_context * ssl)2959 static inline void *mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p(
2960     mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2961 {
2962     return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p;
2963 }
2964 
2965 /** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL context as an integer.
2966  *
2967  * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n(), or
2968  * \c 0 if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() has not previously been
2969  * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() has
2970  * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n().
2971  *
2972  * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2973  * \return               The current value of the user data.
2974  */
mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n(mbedtls_ssl_context * ssl)2975 static inline uintptr_t mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n(
2976     mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2977 {
2978     return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n;
2979 }
2980 
2981 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
2982 /**
2983  * \brief           Configure asynchronous private key operation callbacks.
2984  *
2985  * \param conf              SSL configuration context
2986  * \param f_async_sign      Callback to start a signature operation. See
2987  *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t
2988  *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if the
2989  *                          external processor does not support any signature
2990  *                          operation; in this case the private key object
2991  *                          associated with the certificate will be used.
2992  * \param f_async_decrypt   Callback to start a decryption operation. See
2993  *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t
2994  *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if the
2995  *                          external processor does not support any decryption
2996  *                          operation; in this case the private key object
2997  *                          associated with the certificate will be used.
2998  * \param f_async_resume    Callback to resume an asynchronous operation. See
2999  *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t
3000  *                          for more information. This may not be \c NULL unless
3001  *                          \p f_async_sign and \p f_async_decrypt are both
3002  *                          \c NULL.
3003  * \param f_async_cancel    Callback to cancel an asynchronous operation. See
3004  *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t
3005  *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if
3006  *                          no cleanup is needed.
3007  * \param config_data       A pointer to configuration data which can be
3008  *                          retrieved with
3009  *                          mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_async_config_data(). The
3010  *                          library stores this value without dereferencing it.
3011  */
3012 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3013                                        mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t *f_async_sign,
3014                                        mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t *f_async_decrypt,
3015                                        mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t *f_async_resume,
3016                                        mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t *f_async_cancel,
3017                                        void *config_data);
3018 
3019 /**
3020  * \brief           Retrieve the configuration data set by
3021  *                  mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb().
3022  *
3023  * \param conf      SSL configuration context
3024  * \return          The configuration data set by
3025  *                  mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb().
3026  */
3027 void *mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_async_config_data(const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
3028 
3029 /**
3030  * \brief           Retrieve the asynchronous operation user context.
3031  *
3032  * \note            This function may only be called while a handshake
3033  *                  is in progress.
3034  *
3035  * \param ssl       The SSL context to access.
3036  *
3037  * \return          The asynchronous operation user context that was last
3038  *                  set during the current handshake. If
3039  *                  mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data() has not yet been
3040  *                  called during the current handshake, this function returns
3041  *                  \c NULL.
3042  */
3043 void *mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
3044 
3045 /**
3046  * \brief           Retrieve the asynchronous operation user context.
3047  *
3048  * \note            This function may only be called while a handshake
3049  *                  is in progress.
3050  *
3051  * \param ssl       The SSL context to access.
3052  * \param ctx       The new value of the asynchronous operation user context.
3053  *                  Call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data() later during the
3054  *                  same handshake to retrieve this value.
3055  */
3056 void mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3057                                           void *ctx);
3058 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
3059 
3060 /**
3061  * \brief          Callback type: generate a cookie
3062  *
3063  * \param ctx      Context for the callback
3064  * \param p        Buffer to write to,
3065  *                 must be updated to point right after the cookie
3066  * \param end      Pointer to one past the end of the output buffer
3067  * \param info     Client ID info that was passed to
3068  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id()
3069  * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
3070  *
3071  * \return         The callback must return 0 on success,
3072  *                 or a negative error code.
3073  */
3074 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cookie_write_t(void *ctx,
3075                                        unsigned char **p, unsigned char *end,
3076                                        const unsigned char *info, size_t ilen);
3077 
3078 /**
3079  * \brief          Callback type: verify a cookie
3080  *
3081  * \param ctx      Context for the callback
3082  * \param cookie   Cookie to verify
3083  * \param clen     Length of cookie
3084  * \param info     Client ID info that was passed to
3085  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id()
3086  * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
3087  *
3088  * \return         The callback must return 0 if cookie is valid,
3089  *                 or a negative error code.
3090  */
3091 typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cookie_check_t(void *ctx,
3092                                        const unsigned char *cookie, size_t clen,
3093                                        const unsigned char *info, size_t ilen);
3094 
3095 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3096 /**
3097  * \brief           Register callbacks for DTLS cookies
3098  *                  (Server only. DTLS only.)
3099  *
3100  *                  Default: dummy callbacks that fail, in order to force you to
3101  *                  register working callbacks (and initialize their context).
3102  *
3103  *                  To disable HelloVerifyRequest, register NULL callbacks.
3104  *
3105  * \warning         Disabling hello verification allows your server to be used
3106  *                  for amplification in DoS attacks against other hosts.
3107  *                  Only disable if you known this can't happen in your
3108  *                  particular environment.
3109  *
3110  * \note            See comments on \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() about handling
3111  *                  the MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED that is expected
3112  *                  on the first handshake attempt when this is enabled.
3113  *
3114  * \note            This is also necessary to handle client reconnection from
3115  *                  the same port as described in RFC 6347 section 4.2.8 (only
3116  *                  the variant with cookies is supported currently). See
3117  *                  comments on \c mbedtls_ssl_read() for details.
3118  *
3119  * \param conf              SSL configuration
3120  * \param f_cookie_write    Cookie write callback
3121  * \param f_cookie_check    Cookie check callback
3122  * \param p_cookie          Context for both callbacks
3123  */
3124 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_cookies(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3125                                    mbedtls_ssl_cookie_write_t *f_cookie_write,
3126                                    mbedtls_ssl_cookie_check_t *f_cookie_check,
3127                                    void *p_cookie);
3128 
3129 /**
3130  * \brief          Set client's transport-level identification info.
3131  *                 (Server only. DTLS only.)
3132  *
3133  *                 This is usually the IP address (and port), but could be
3134  *                 anything identify the client depending on the underlying
3135  *                 network stack. Used for HelloVerifyRequest with DTLS.
3136  *                 This is *not* used to route the actual packets.
3137  *
3138  * \param ssl      SSL context
3139  * \param info     Transport-level info identifying the client (eg IP + port)
3140  * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
3141  *
3142  * \note           An internal copy is made, so the info buffer can be reused.
3143  *
3144  * \return         0 on success,
3145  *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if used on client,
3146  *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if out of memory.
3147  */
3148 int mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3149                                         const unsigned char *info,
3150                                         size_t ilen);
3151 
3152 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3153 
3154 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
3155 /**
3156  * \brief          Enable or disable anti-replay protection for DTLS.
3157  *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3158  *                 Default: enabled.
3159  *
3160  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3161  * \param mode     MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_DISABLED.
3162  *
3163  * \warning        Disabling this is a security risk unless the application
3164  *                 protocol handles duplicated packets in a safe way. You
3165  *                 should not disable this without careful consideration.
3166  *                 However, if your application already detects duplicated
3167  *                 packets and needs information about them to adjust its
3168  *                 transmission strategy, then you'll want to disable this.
3169  */
3170 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_anti_replay(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char mode);
3171 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY */
3172 
3173 /**
3174  * \brief          Set a limit on the number of records with a bad MAC
3175  *                 before terminating the connection.
3176  *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3177  *                 Default: 0 (disabled).
3178  *
3179  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3180  * \param limit    Limit, or 0 to disable.
3181  *
3182  * \note           If the limit is N, then the connection is terminated when
3183  *                 the Nth non-authentic record is seen.
3184  *
3185  * \note           Records with an invalid header are not counted, only the
3186  *                 ones going through the authentication-decryption phase.
3187  *
3188  * \note           This is a security trade-off related to the fact that it's
3189  *                 often relatively easy for an active attacker to inject UDP
3190  *                 datagrams. On one hand, setting a low limit here makes it
3191  *                 easier for such an attacker to forcibly terminated a
3192  *                 connection. On the other hand, a high limit or no limit
3193  *                 might make us waste resources checking authentication on
3194  *                 many bogus packets.
3195  */
3196 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_badmac_limit(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, unsigned limit);
3197 
3198 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
3199 
3200 /**
3201  * \brief          Allow or disallow packing of multiple handshake records
3202  *                 within a single datagram.
3203  *
3204  * \param ssl           The SSL context to configure.
3205  * \param allow_packing This determines whether datagram packing may
3206  *                      be used or not. A value of \c 0 means that every
3207  *                      record will be sent in a separate datagram; a
3208  *                      value of \c 1 means that, if space permits,
3209  *                      multiple handshake messages (including CCS) belonging to
3210  *                      a single flight may be packed within a single datagram.
3211  *
3212  * \note           This is enabled by default and should only be disabled
3213  *                 for test purposes, or if datagram packing causes
3214  *                 interoperability issues with peers that don't support it.
3215  *
3216  * \note           Allowing datagram packing reduces the network load since
3217  *                 there's less overhead if multiple messages share the same
3218  *                 datagram. Also, it increases the handshake efficiency
3219  *                 since messages belonging to a single datagram will not
3220  *                 be reordered in transit, and so future message buffering
3221  *                 or flight retransmission (if no buffering is used) as
3222  *                 means to deal with reordering are needed less frequently.
3223  *
3224  * \note           Application records are not affected by this option and
3225  *                 are currently always sent in separate datagrams.
3226  *
3227  */
3228 void mbedtls_ssl_set_datagram_packing(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3229                                       unsigned allow_packing);
3230 
3231 /**
3232  * \brief          Set retransmit timeout values for the DTLS handshake.
3233  *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3234  *
3235  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3236  * \param min      Initial timeout value in milliseconds.
3237  *                 Default: 1000 (1 second).
3238  * \param max      Maximum timeout value in milliseconds.
3239  *                 Default: 60000 (60 seconds).
3240  *
3241  * \note           Default values are from RFC 6347 section 4.2.4.1.
3242  *
3243  * \note           The 'min' value should typically be slightly above the
3244  *                 expected round-trip time to your peer, plus whatever time
3245  *                 it takes for the peer to process the message. For example,
3246  *                 if your RTT is about 600ms and you peer needs up to 1s to
3247  *                 do the cryptographic operations in the handshake, then you
3248  *                 should set 'min' slightly above 1600. Lower values of 'min'
3249  *                 might cause spurious resends which waste network resources,
3250  *                 while larger value of 'min' will increase overall latency
3251  *                 on unreliable network links.
3252  *
3253  * \note           The more unreliable your network connection is, the larger
3254  *                 your max / min ratio needs to be in order to achieve
3255  *                 reliable handshakes.
3256  *
3257  * \note           Messages are retransmitted up to log2(ceil(max/min)) times.
3258  *                 For example, if min = 1s and max = 5s, the retransmit plan
3259  *                 goes: send ... 1s -> resend ... 2s -> resend ... 4s ->
3260  *                 resend ... 5s -> give up and return a timeout error.
3261  */
3262 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_handshake_timeout(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t min, uint32_t max);
3263 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
3264 
3265 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3266 /**
3267  * \brief          Set the session cache callbacks (server-side only)
3268  *                 If not set, no session resuming is done (except if session
3269  *                 tickets are enabled too).
3270  *
3271  *                 The session cache has the responsibility to check for stale
3272  *                 entries based on timeout. See RFC 5246 for recommendations.
3273  *
3274  *                 Warning: session.peer_cert is cleared by the SSL/TLS layer on
3275  *                 connection shutdown, so do not cache the pointer! Either set
3276  *                 it to NULL or make a full copy of the certificate.
3277  *
3278  *                 The get callback is called once during the initial handshake
3279  *                 to enable session resuming. The get function has the
3280  *                 following parameters: (void *parameter, mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
3281  *                 If a valid entry is found, it should fill the master of
3282  *                 the session object with the cached values and return 0,
3283  *                 return 1 otherwise. Optionally peer_cert can be set as well
3284  *                 if it is properly present in cache entry.
3285  *
3286  *                 The set callback is called once during the initial handshake
3287  *                 to enable session resuming after the entire handshake has
3288  *                 been finished. The set function has the following parameters:
3289  *                 (void *parameter, const mbedtls_ssl_session *session). The function
3290  *                 should create a cache entry for future retrieval based on
3291  *                 the data in the session structure and should keep in mind
3292  *                 that the mbedtls_ssl_session object presented (and all its referenced
3293  *                 data) is cleared by the SSL/TLS layer when the connection is
3294  *                 terminated. It is recommended to add metadata to determine if
3295  *                 an entry is still valid in the future. Return 0 if
3296  *                 successfully cached, return 1 otherwise.
3297  *
3298  * \param conf           SSL configuration
3299  * \param p_cache        parameter (context) for both callbacks
3300  * \param f_get_cache    session get callback
3301  * \param f_set_cache    session set callback
3302  */
3303 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_cache(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3304                                     void *p_cache,
3305                                     mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t *f_get_cache,
3306                                     mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t *f_set_cache);
3307 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3308 
3309 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
3310 /**
3311  * \brief          Load a session for session resumption.
3312  *
3313  *                 Sessions loaded through this call will be considered
3314  *                 for session resumption in the next handshake.
3315  *
3316  * \note           Even if this call succeeds, it is not guaranteed that
3317  *                 the next handshake will indeed be shortened through the
3318  *                 use of session resumption: The server is always free
3319  *                 to reject any attempt for resumption and fall back to
3320  *                 a full handshake.
3321  *
3322  * \note           This function can handle a variety of mechanisms for session
3323  *                 resumption: For TLS 1.2, both session ID-based resumption
3324  *                 and ticket-based resumption will be considered. For TLS 1.3,
3325  *                 sessions equate to tickets, and loading one session by
3326  *                 calling this function will lead to its corresponding ticket
3327  *                 being advertised as resumption PSK by the client. This
3328  *                 depends on session tickets being enabled (see
3329  *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option) though.
3330  *                 If session tickets are disabled, a call to this function
3331  *                 with a TLS 1.3 session, will not have any effect on the next
3332  *                 handshake for the SSL context \p ssl.
3333  *
3334  * \param ssl      The SSL context representing the connection which should
3335  *                 be attempted to be setup using session resumption. This
3336  *                 must be initialized via mbedtls_ssl_init() and bound to
3337  *                 an SSL configuration via mbedtls_ssl_setup(), but
3338  *                 the handshake must not yet have been started.
3339  * \param session  The session to be considered for session resumption.
3340  *                 This must be a session previously exported via
3341  *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_session(), and potentially serialized and
3342  *                 deserialized through mbedtls_ssl_session_save() and
3343  *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_load() in the meantime.
3344  *
3345  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3346  * \return         \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if the session
3347  *                 could not be loaded because one session has already been
3348  *                 loaded. This error is non-fatal, and has no observable
3349  *                 effect on the SSL context or the session that was attempted
3350  *                 to be loaded.
3351  * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3352  *
3353  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_session()
3354  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_session_load()
3355  */
3356 int mbedtls_ssl_set_session(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
3357 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
3358 
3359 /**
3360  * \brief          Load serialized session data into a session structure.
3361  *                 On client, this can be used for loading saved sessions
3362  *                 before resuming them with mbedtls_ssl_set_session().
3363  *                 On server, this can be used for alternative implementations
3364  *                 of session cache or session tickets.
3365  *
3366  * \warning        If a peer certificate chain is associated with the session,
3367  *                 the serialized state will only contain the peer's
3368  *                 end-entity certificate and the result of the chain
3369  *                 verification (unless verification was disabled), but not
3370  *                 the rest of the chain.
3371  *
3372  * \see            mbedtls_ssl_session_save()
3373  * \see            mbedtls_ssl_set_session()
3374  *
3375  * \param session  The session structure to be populated. It must have been
3376  *                 initialised with mbedtls_ssl_session_init() but not
3377  *                 populated yet.
3378  * \param buf      The buffer holding the serialized session data. It must be a
3379  *                 readable buffer of at least \p len bytes.
3380  * \param len      The size of the serialized data in bytes.
3381  *
3382  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3383  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed.
3384  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
3385  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH if the serialized data
3386  *                 was generated in a different version or configuration of
3387  *                 Mbed TLS.
3388  * \return         Another negative value for other kinds of errors (for
3389  *                 example, unsupported features in the embedded certificate).
3390  */
3391 int mbedtls_ssl_session_load(mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
3392                              const unsigned char *buf,
3393                              size_t len);
3394 
3395 /**
3396  * \brief          Save session structure as serialized data in a buffer.
3397  *                 On client, this can be used for saving session data,
3398  *                 potentially in non-volatile storage, for resuming later.
3399  *                 On server, this can be used for alternative implementations
3400  *                 of session cache or session tickets.
3401  *
3402  * \see            mbedtls_ssl_session_load()
3403  *
3404  * \param session  The session structure to be saved.
3405  * \param buf      The buffer to write the serialized data to. It must be a
3406  *                 writeable buffer of at least \p buf_len bytes, or may be \c
3407  *                 NULL if \p buf_len is \c 0.
3408  * \param buf_len  The number of bytes available for writing in \p buf.
3409  * \param olen     The size in bytes of the data that has been or would have
3410  *                 been written. It must point to a valid \c size_t.
3411  *
3412  * \note           \p olen is updated to the correct value regardless of
3413  *                 whether \p buf_len was large enough. This makes it possible
3414  *                 to determine the necessary size by calling this function
3415  *                 with \p buf set to \c NULL and \p buf_len to \c 0.
3416  *
3417  * \note           For TLS 1.3 sessions, this feature is supported only if the
3418  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option is enabled,
3419  *                 as in TLS 1.3 session resumption is possible only with
3420  *                 tickets.
3421  *
3422  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3423  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL if \p buf is too small.
3424  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if the
3425  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option is disabled
3426  *                 and the session is a TLS 1.3 session.
3427  */
3428 int mbedtls_ssl_session_save(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
3429                              unsigned char *buf,
3430                              size_t buf_len,
3431                              size_t *olen);
3432 
3433 /**
3434  * \brief               Set the list of allowed ciphersuites and the preference
3435  *                      order. First in the list has the highest preference.
3436  *
3437  *                      For TLS 1.2, the notion of ciphersuite determines both
3438  *                      the key exchange mechanism and the suite of symmetric
3439  *                      algorithms to be used during and after the handshake.
3440  *
3441  *                      For TLS 1.3 (in development), the notion of ciphersuite
3442  *                      only determines the suite of symmetric algorithms to be
3443  *                      used during and after the handshake, while key exchange
3444  *                      mechanisms are configured separately.
3445  *
3446  *                      In Mbed TLS, ciphersuites for both TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3
3447  *                      are configured via this function. For users of TLS 1.3,
3448  *                      there will be separate API for the configuration of key
3449  *                      exchange mechanisms.
3450  *
3451  *                      The list of ciphersuites passed to this function may
3452  *                      contain a mixture of TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3 ciphersuite
3453  *                      identifiers. This is useful if negotiation of TLS 1.3
3454  *                      should be attempted, but a fallback to TLS 1.2 would
3455  *                      be tolerated.
3456  *
3457  * \note                By default, the server chooses its preferred
3458  *                      ciphersuite among those that the client supports. If
3459  *                      mbedtls_ssl_conf_preference_order() is called to prefer
3460  *                      the client's preferences, the server instead chooses
3461  *                      the client's preferred ciphersuite among those that
3462  *                      the server supports.
3463  *
3464  * \warning             The ciphersuites array \p ciphersuites is not copied.
3465  *                      It must remain valid for the lifetime of the SSL
3466  *                      configuration \p conf.
3467  *
3468  * \param conf          The SSL configuration to modify.
3469  * \param ciphersuites  A 0-terminated list of IANA identifiers of supported
3470  *                      ciphersuites, accessible through \c MBEDTLS_TLS_XXX
3471  *                      and \c MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_XXX macros defined in
3472  *                      ssl_ciphersuites.h.
3473  */
3474 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3475                                    const int *ciphersuites);
3476 
3477 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
3478 /**
3479  * \brief Set the supported key exchange modes for TLS 1.3 connections.
3480  *
3481  *        In contrast to TLS 1.2, the ciphersuite concept in TLS 1.3 does not
3482  *        include the choice of key exchange mechanism. It is therefore not
3483  *        covered by the API mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(). See the
3484  *        documentation of mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites() for more
3485  *        information on the ciphersuite concept in TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3.
3486  *
3487  *        The present function is specific to TLS 1.3 and allows users to
3488  *        configure the set of supported key exchange mechanisms in TLS 1.3.
3489  *
3490  * \param conf       The SSL configuration the change should apply to.
3491  * \param kex_modes  A bitwise combination of one or more of the following:
3492  *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK
3493  *                     This flag enables pure-PSK key exchanges.
3494  *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL
3495  *                     This flag enables combined PSK-ephemeral key exchanges.
3496  *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL
3497  *                     This flag enables pure-ephemeral key exchanges.
3498  *                   For convenience, the following pre-defined macros are
3499  *                   available for combinations of the above:
3500  *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_ALL
3501  *                     Includes all of pure-PSK, PSK-ephemeral and pure-ephemeral.
3502  *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_ALL
3503  *                     Includes both pure-PSK and combined PSK-ephemeral
3504  *                     key exchanges, but excludes pure-ephemeral key exchanges.
3505  *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL_ALL
3506  *                     Includes both pure-ephemeral and combined PSK-ephemeral
3507  *                     key exchanges.
3508  *
3509  * \note  If a PSK-based key exchange mode shall be supported, applications
3510  *        must also use the APIs mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3511  *        mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()
3512  *        to configure the PSKs to be used.
3513  *
3514  * \note  If a pure-ephemeral key exchange mode shall be supported,
3515  *        server-side applications must also provide a certificate via
3516  *        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert().
3517  *
3518  */
3519 
3520 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_key_exchange_modes(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3521                                                const int kex_modes);
3522 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
3523 
3524 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
3525 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_IGNORE 0
3526 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_FAIL   1
3527 /**
3528  * \brief               Specify the length of Connection IDs for incoming
3529  *                      encrypted DTLS records, as well as the behaviour
3530  *                      on unexpected CIDs.
3531  *
3532  *                      By default, the CID length is set to \c 0,
3533  *                      and unexpected CIDs are silently ignored.
3534  *
3535  * \param conf          The SSL configuration to modify.
3536  * \param len           The length in Bytes of the CID fields in encrypted
3537  *                      DTLS records using the CID mechanism. This must
3538  *                      not be larger than #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX.
3539  * \param ignore_other_cids This determines the stack's behaviour when
3540  *                          receiving a record with an unexpected CID.
3541  *                          Possible values are:
3542  *                          - #MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_IGNORE
3543  *                            In this case, the record is silently ignored.
3544  *                          - #MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_FAIL
3545  *                            In this case, the stack fails with the specific
3546  *                            error code #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID.
3547  *
3548  * \note                The CID specification allows implementations to either
3549  *                      use a common length for all incoming connection IDs or
3550  *                      allow variable-length incoming IDs. Mbed TLS currently
3551  *                      requires a common length for all connections sharing the
3552  *                      same SSL configuration; this allows simpler parsing of
3553  *                      record headers.
3554  *
3555  * \return              \c 0 on success.
3556  * \return              #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if \p len
3557  *                      is too large.
3558  */
3559 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_cid(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, size_t len,
3560                          int ignore_other_cids);
3561 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
3562 
3563 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
3564 /**
3565  * \brief          Set the X.509 security profile used for verification
3566  *
3567  * \note           The restrictions are enforced for all certificates in the
3568  *                 chain. However, signatures in the handshake are not covered
3569  *                 by this setting but by \b mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_hashes().
3570  *
3571  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3572  * \param profile  Profile to use
3573  */
3574 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3575                                    const mbedtls_x509_crt_profile *profile);
3576 
3577 /**
3578  * \brief          Set the data required to verify peer certificate
3579  *
3580  * \note           See \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify() for notes regarding the
3581  *                 parameters ca_chain (maps to trust_ca for that function)
3582  *                 and ca_crl.
3583  *
3584  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3585  * \param ca_chain trusted CA chain (meaning all fully trusted top-level CAs)
3586  * \param ca_crl   trusted CA CRLs
3587  */
3588 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3589                                mbedtls_x509_crt *ca_chain,
3590                                mbedtls_x509_crl *ca_crl);
3591 
3592 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
3593 /**
3594  * \brief          Set DN hints sent to client in CertificateRequest message
3595  *
3596  * \note           If not set, subject distinguished names (DNs) are taken
3597  *                 from \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain()
3598  *                 or \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain())
3599  *
3600  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3601  * \param crt      crt chain whose subject DNs are issuer DNs of client certs
3602  *                 from which the client should select client peer certificate.
3603  */
3604 static inline
mbedtls_ssl_conf_dn_hints(mbedtls_ssl_config * conf,const mbedtls_x509_crt * crt)3605 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dn_hints(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3606                                const mbedtls_x509_crt *crt)
3607 {
3608     conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dn_hints) = crt;
3609 }
3610 #endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED */
3611 
3612 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK)
3613 /**
3614  * \brief          Set the trusted certificate callback.
3615  *
3616  *                 This API allows to register the set of trusted certificates
3617  *                 through a callback, instead of a linked list as configured
3618  *                 by mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain().
3619  *
3620  *                 This is useful for example in contexts where a large number
3621  *                 of CAs are used, and the inefficiency of maintaining them
3622  *                 in a linked list cannot be tolerated. It is also useful when
3623  *                 the set of trusted CAs needs to be modified frequently.
3624  *
3625  *                 See the documentation of `mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t` for
3626  *                 more information.
3627  *
3628  * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
3629  * \param f_ca_cb  The trusted certificate callback to use when verifying
3630  *                 certificate chains.
3631  * \param p_ca_cb  The context to be passed to \p f_ca_cb (for example,
3632  *                 a reference to a trusted CA database).
3633  *
3634  * \note           This API is incompatible with mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain():
3635  *                 Any call to this function overwrites the values set through
3636  *                 earlier calls to mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain() or
3637  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb().
3638  *
3639  * \note           This API is incompatible with CA indication in
3640  *                 CertificateRequest messages: A server-side SSL context which
3641  *                 is bound to an SSL configuration that uses a CA callback
3642  *                 configured via mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(), and which requires
3643  *                 client authentication, will send an empty CA list in the
3644  *                 corresponding CertificateRequest message.
3645  *
3646  * \note           This API is incompatible with mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain():
3647  *                 If an SSL context is bound to an SSL configuration which uses
3648  *                 CA callbacks configured via mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(), then
3649  *                 calls to mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain() have no effect.
3650  *
3651  * \note           The use of this API disables the use of restartable ECC
3652  *                 during X.509 CRT signature verification (but doesn't affect
3653  *                 other uses).
3654  *
3655  * \warning        This API is incompatible with the use of CRLs. Any call to
3656  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb() unsets CRLs configured through
3657  *                 earlier calls to mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain().
3658  *
3659  * \warning        In multi-threaded environments, the callback \p f_ca_cb
3660  *                 must be thread-safe, and it is the user's responsibility
3661  *                 to guarantee this (for example through a mutex
3662  *                 contained in the callback context pointed to by \p p_ca_cb).
3663  */
3664 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3665                             mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t f_ca_cb,
3666                             void *p_ca_cb);
3667 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK */
3668 
3669 /**
3670  * \brief          Set own certificate chain and private key
3671  *
3672  * \note           own_cert should contain in order from the bottom up your
3673  *                 certificate chain. The top certificate (self-signed)
3674  *                 can be omitted.
3675  *
3676  * \note           On server, this function can be called multiple times to
3677  *                 provision more than one cert/key pair (eg one ECDSA, one
3678  *                 RSA with SHA-256, one RSA with SHA-1). An adequate
3679  *                 certificate will be selected according to the client's
3680  *                 advertised capabilities. In case multiple certificates are
3681  *                 adequate, preference is given to the one set by the first
3682  *                 call to this function, then second, etc.
3683  *
3684  * \note           On client, only the first call has any effect. That is,
3685  *                 only one client certificate can be provisioned. The
3686  *                 server's preferences in its CertificateRequest message will
3687  *                 be ignored and our only cert will be sent regardless of
3688  *                 whether it matches those preferences - the server can then
3689  *                 decide what it wants to do with it.
3690  *
3691  * \note           The provided \p pk_key needs to match the public key in the
3692  *                 first certificate in \p own_cert, or all handshakes using
3693  *                 that certificate will fail. It is your responsibility
3694  *                 to ensure that; this function will not perform any check.
3695  *                 You may use mbedtls_pk_check_pair() in order to perform
3696  *                 this check yourself, but be aware that this function can
3697  *                 be computationally expensive on some key types.
3698  *
3699  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3700  * \param own_cert own public certificate chain
3701  * \param pk_key   own private key
3702  *
3703  * \return         0 on success or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED
3704  */
3705 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3706                               mbedtls_x509_crt *own_cert,
3707                               mbedtls_pk_context *pk_key);
3708 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
3709 
3710 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
3711 /**
3712  * \brief          Configure pre-shared keys (PSKs) and their
3713  *                 identities to be used in PSK-based ciphersuites.
3714  *
3715  *                 Only one PSK can be registered, through either
3716  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3717  *                 If you attempt to register more than one PSK, this function
3718  *                 fails, though this may change in future versions, which
3719  *                 may add support for multiple PSKs.
3720  *
3721  * \note           This is mainly useful for clients. Servers will usually
3722  *                 want to use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() instead.
3723  *
3724  * \note           A PSK set by \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk() in the PSK callback
3725  *                 takes precedence over a PSK configured by this function.
3726  *
3727  * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the PSK with.
3728  * \param psk      The pointer to the pre-shared key to use.
3729  * \param psk_len  The length of the pre-shared key in bytes.
3730  * \param psk_identity      The pointer to the pre-shared key identity.
3731  * \param psk_identity_len  The length of the pre-shared key identity
3732  *                          in bytes.
3733  *
3734  * \note           The PSK and its identity are copied internally and
3735  *                 hence need not be preserved by the caller for the lifetime
3736  *                 of the SSL configuration.
3737  *
3738  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3739  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if no more PSKs
3740  *                 can be configured. In this case, the old PSK(s) remain intact.
3741  * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3742  */
3743 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3744                          const unsigned char *psk, size_t psk_len,
3745                          const unsigned char *psk_identity, size_t psk_identity_len);
3746 
3747 #if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
3748 /**
3749  * \brief          Configure one or more opaque pre-shared keys (PSKs) and
3750  *                 their identities to be used in PSK-based ciphersuites.
3751  *
3752  *                 Only one PSK can be registered, through either
3753  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3754  *                 If you attempt to register more than one PSK, this function
3755  *                 fails, though this may change in future versions, which
3756  *                 may add support for multiple PSKs.
3757  *
3758  * \note           This is mainly useful for clients. Servers will usually
3759  *                 want to use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() instead.
3760  *
3761  * \note           An opaque PSK set by \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque() in
3762  *                 the PSK callback takes precedence over an opaque PSK
3763  *                 configured by this function.
3764  *
3765  * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the PSK with.
3766  * \param psk      The identifier of the key slot holding the PSK.
3767  *                 Until \p conf is destroyed or this function is successfully
3768  *                 called again, the key slot \p psk must be populated with a
3769  *                 key of type PSA_ALG_CATEGORY_KEY_DERIVATION whose policy
3770  *                 allows its use for the key derivation algorithm applied
3771  *                 in the handshake.
3772  * \param psk_identity      The pointer to the pre-shared key identity.
3773  * \param psk_identity_len  The length of the pre-shared key identity
3774  *                          in bytes.
3775  *
3776  * \note           The PSK identity hint is copied internally and hence need
3777  *                 not be preserved by the caller for the lifetime of the
3778  *                 SSL configuration.
3779  *
3780  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3781  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if no more PSKs
3782  *                 can be configured. In this case, the old PSK(s) remain intact.
3783  * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3784  */
3785 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3786                                 mbedtls_svc_key_id_t psk,
3787                                 const unsigned char *psk_identity,
3788                                 size_t psk_identity_len);
3789 #endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
3790 
3791 /**
3792  * \brief          Set the pre-shared Key (PSK) for the current handshake.
3793  *
3794  * \note           This should only be called inside the PSK callback,
3795  *                 i.e. the function passed to \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb().
3796  *
3797  * \note           A PSK set by this function takes precedence over a PSK
3798  *                 configured by \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
3799  *
3800  * \param ssl      The SSL context to configure a PSK for.
3801  * \param psk      The pointer to the pre-shared key.
3802  * \param psk_len  The length of the pre-shared key in bytes.
3803  *
3804  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3805  * \return         An \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_XXX error code on failure.
3806  */
3807 int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3808                            const unsigned char *psk, size_t psk_len);
3809 
3810 #if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
3811 /**
3812  * \brief          Set an opaque pre-shared Key (PSK) for the current handshake.
3813  *
3814  * \note           This should only be called inside the PSK callback,
3815  *                 i.e. the function passed to \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb().
3816  *
3817  * \note           An opaque PSK set by this function takes precedence over an
3818  *                 opaque PSK configured by \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3819  *
3820  * \param ssl      The SSL context to configure a PSK for.
3821  * \param psk      The identifier of the key slot holding the PSK.
3822  *                 For the duration of the current handshake, the key slot
3823  *                 must be populated with a key of type
3824  *                 PSA_ALG_CATEGORY_KEY_DERIVATION whose policy allows its
3825  *                 use for the key derivation algorithm
3826  *                 applied in the handshake.
3827  *
3828  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3829  * \return         An \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_XXX error code on failure.
3830  */
3831 int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3832                                   mbedtls_svc_key_id_t psk);
3833 #endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
3834 
3835 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3836 /**
3837  * \brief          Set the PSK callback (server-side only).
3838  *
3839  *                 If set, the PSK callback is called for each
3840  *                 handshake where a PSK-based ciphersuite was negotiated.
3841  *                 The caller provides the identity received and wants to
3842  *                 receive the actual PSK data and length.
3843  *
3844  *                 The callback has the following parameters:
3845  *                 - \c void*: The opaque pointer \p p_psk.
3846  *                 - \c mbedtls_ssl_context*: The SSL context to which
3847  *                                            the operation applies.
3848  *                 - \c const unsigned char*: The PSK identity
3849  *                                            selected by the client.
3850  *                 - \c size_t: The length of the PSK identity
3851  *                              selected by the client.
3852  *
3853  *                 If a valid PSK identity is found, the callback should use
3854  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk() or
3855  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque()
3856  *                 on the SSL context to set the correct PSK and return \c 0.
3857  *                 Any other return value will result in a denied PSK identity.
3858  *
3859  * \note           A dynamic PSK (i.e. set by the PSK callback) takes
3860  *                 precedence over a static PSK (i.e. set by
3861  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3862  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()).
3863  *                 This means that if you set a PSK callback using this
3864  *                 function, you don't need to set a PSK using
3865  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3866  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()).
3867  *
3868  * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
3869  * \param f_psk    The callback for selecting and setting the PSK based
3870  *                 in the PSK identity chosen by the client.
3871  * \param p_psk    A pointer to an opaque structure to be passed to
3872  *                 the callback, for example a PSK store.
3873  */
3874 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3875                              int (*f_psk)(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *,
3876                                           size_t),
3877                              void *p_psk);
3878 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3879 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED */
3880 
3881 #if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3882 /**
3883  * \brief          Set the Diffie-Hellman public P and G values
3884  *                 from big-endian binary presentations.
3885  *                 (Default values: MBEDTLS_DHM_RFC3526_MODP_2048_[PG]_BIN)
3886  *
3887  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3888  * \param dhm_P    Diffie-Hellman-Merkle modulus in big-endian binary form
3889  * \param P_len    Length of DHM modulus
3890  * \param dhm_G    Diffie-Hellman-Merkle generator in big-endian binary form
3891  * \param G_len    Length of DHM generator
3892  *
3893  * \return         0 if successful
3894  */
3895 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dh_param_bin(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3896                                   const unsigned char *dhm_P, size_t P_len,
3897                                   const unsigned char *dhm_G,  size_t G_len);
3898 
3899 /**
3900  * \brief          Set the Diffie-Hellman public P and G values,
3901  *                 read from existing context (server-side only)
3902  *
3903  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3904  * \param dhm_ctx  Diffie-Hellman-Merkle context
3905  *
3906  * \return         0 if successful
3907  */
3908 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dh_param_ctx(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, mbedtls_dhm_context *dhm_ctx);
3909 #endif /* MBEDTLS_DHM_C && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) */
3910 
3911 #if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
3912 /**
3913  * \brief          Set the minimum length for Diffie-Hellman parameters.
3914  *                 (Client-side only.)
3915  *                 (Default: 1024 bits.)
3916  *
3917  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3918  * \param bitlen   Minimum bit length of the DHM prime
3919  */
3920 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dhm_min_bitlen(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3921                                      unsigned int bitlen);
3922 #endif /* MBEDTLS_DHM_C && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
3923 
3924 #if defined(MBEDTLS_ECP_C)
3925 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
3926 /**
3927  * \brief          Set the allowed curves in order of preference.
3928  *
3929  *                 On server: this only affects selection of the ECDHE curve;
3930  *                 the curves used for ECDH and ECDSA are determined by the
3931  *                 list of available certificates instead.
3932  *
3933  *                 On client: this affects the list of curves offered for any
3934  *                 use. The server can override our preference order.
3935  *
3936  *                 Both sides: limits the set of curves accepted for use in
3937  *                 ECDHE and in the peer's end-entity certificate.
3938  *
3939  * \deprecated     Superseded by mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups().
3940  *
3941  * \note           This has no influence on which curves are allowed inside the
3942  *                 certificate chains, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile()
3943  *                 for that. For the end-entity certificate however, the key
3944  *                 will be accepted only if it is allowed both by this list
3945  *                 and by the cert profile.
3946  *
3947  * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
3948  *                 (preferred curve first).
3949  *
3950  * \note           The default list is the same set of curves that
3951  *                 #mbedtls_x509_crt_profile_default allows, plus
3952  *                 ECDHE-only curves selected according to the same criteria.
3953  *                 The order favors curves with the lowest resource usage.
3954  *
3955  * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS may extend this list,
3956  *                 for example if new curves are added to the library.
3957  *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
3958  *                 from this list unless serious security concerns require it.
3959  *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS may change the order in
3960  *                 keeping with the general principle of favoring the lowest
3961  *                 resource usage.
3962  *
3963  * \param conf     SSL configuration
3964  * \param curves   Ordered list of allowed curves,
3965  *                 terminated by MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_NONE.
3966  */
3967 void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3968                                                 const mbedtls_ecp_group_id *curves);
3969 #endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
3970 #endif /* MBEDTLS_ECP_C */
3971 
3972 /**
3973  * \brief          Set the allowed groups in order of preference.
3974  *
3975  *                 On server: This only affects the choice of key agreement mechanism
3976  *
3977  *                 On client: this affects the list of groups offered for any
3978  *                 use. The server can override our preference order.
3979  *
3980  *                 Both sides: limits the set of groups accepted for use in
3981  *                 key sharing.
3982  *
3983  * \note           This function replaces the deprecated mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves(),
3984  *                 which only allows ECP curves to be configured.
3985  *
3986  * \note           The most recent invocation of either mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves()
3987  *                 or mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups() nullifies all previous invocations
3988  *                 of both.
3989  *
3990  * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
3991  *                 (preferred group first).
3992  *
3993  * \note           When this function is not called, a default list is used,
3994  *                 consisting of all supported curves at 255 bits and above,
3995  *                 and all supported finite fields at 2048 bits and above.
3996  *                 The order favors groups with the lowest resource usage.
3997  *
3998  * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
3999  *                 from the default list unless serious security concerns require it.
4000  *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS may change the order in
4001  *                 keeping with the general principle of favoring the lowest
4002  *                 resource usage.
4003  *
4004  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4005  * \param groups   List of allowed groups ordered by preference, terminated by 0.
4006  *                 Must contain valid IANA NamedGroup IDs (provided via either an integer
4007  *                 or using MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_NAMED_GROUP_XXX macros).
4008  */
4009 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4010                              const uint16_t *groups);
4011 
4012 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED)
4013 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2)
4014 /**
4015  * \brief          Set the allowed hashes for signatures during the handshake.
4016  *
4017  * \note           This only affects which hashes are offered and can be used
4018  *                 for signatures during the handshake. Hashes for message
4019  *                 authentication and the TLS PRF are controlled by the
4020  *                 ciphersuite, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(). Hashes
4021  *                 used for certificate signature are controlled by the
4022  *                 verification profile, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile().
4023  *
4024  * \deprecated     Superseded by mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_algs().
4025  *
4026  * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
4027  *                 (preferred hash first).
4028  *
4029  * \note           By default, all supported hashes whose length is at least
4030  *                 256 bits are allowed. This is the same set as the default
4031  *                 for certificate verification
4032  *                 (#mbedtls_x509_crt_profile_default).
4033  *                 The preference order is currently unspecified and may
4034  *                 change in future versions.
4035  *
4036  * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS may extend this list,
4037  *                 for example if new curves are added to the library.
4038  *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
4039  *                 from this list unless serious security concerns require it.
4040  *
4041  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4042  * \param hashes   Ordered list of allowed signature hashes,
4043  *                 terminated by \c MBEDTLS_MD_NONE.
4044  */
4045 void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_hashes(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4046                                                     const int *hashes);
4047 #endif /* !MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED && MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2 */
4048 
4049 /**
4050  * \brief          Configure allowed signature algorithms for use in TLS
4051  *
4052  * \param conf     The SSL configuration to use.
4053  * \param sig_algs List of allowed IANA values for TLS 1.3 signature algorithms,
4054  *                 terminated by #MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_NONE. The list must remain
4055  *                 available throughout the lifetime of the conf object.
4056  *                 - For TLS 1.3, values of \c MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_XXXX should be
4057  *                   used.
4058  *                 - For TLS 1.2, values should be given as
4059  *                   "(HashAlgorithm << 8) | SignatureAlgorithm".
4060  */
4061 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_algs(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4062                                const uint16_t *sig_algs);
4063 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED */
4064 
4065 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
4066 /**
4067  * \brief          Set or reset the hostname to check against the received
4068  *                 peer certificate. On a client, this also sets the
4069  *                 ServerName TLS extension, if that extension is enabled.
4070  *                 On a TLS 1.3 client, this also sets the server name in
4071  *                 the session resumption ticket, if that feature is enabled.
4072  *
4073  * \param ssl      SSL context
4074  * \param hostname The server hostname. This may be \c NULL to clear
4075  *                 the hostname.
4076  *
4077  * \note           Maximum hostname length #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_HOST_NAME_LEN.
4078  *
4079  * \note           If the hostname is \c NULL on a client, then the server
4080  *                 is not authenticated: it only needs to have a valid
4081  *                 certificate, not a certificate matching its name.
4082  *                 Therefore you should always call this function on a client,
4083  *                 unless the connection is set up to only allow
4084  *                 pre-shared keys, or in scenarios where server
4085  *                 impersonation is not a concern. See the documentation of
4086  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
4087  *                 for more details.
4088  *
4089  * \return         0 if successful, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED on
4090  *                 allocation failure, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA on
4091  *                 too long input hostname.
4092  *
4093  *                 Hostname set to the one provided on success (cleared
4094  *                 when NULL). On allocation failure hostname is cleared.
4095  *                 On too long input failure, old hostname is unchanged.
4096  */
4097 int mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const char *hostname);
4098 
4099 /**
4100  * \brief          Get the hostname that checked against the received
4101  *                 server certificate. It is used to set the ServerName
4102  *                 TLS extension, too, if that extension is enabled.
4103  *                 (client-side only)
4104  *
4105  * \param ssl      SSL context
4106  *
4107  * \return         const pointer to the hostname value
4108  */
mbedtls_ssl_get_hostname(mbedtls_ssl_context * ssl)4109 static inline const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_hostname(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
4110 {
4111     return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);
4112 }
4113 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
4114 
4115 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION)
4116 /**
4117  * \brief          Retrieve SNI extension value for the current handshake.
4118  *                 Available in \c f_cert_cb of \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb(),
4119  *                 this is the same value passed to \c f_sni callback of
4120  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni() and may be used instead of
4121  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni().
4122  *
4123  * \param ssl      SSL context
4124  * \param name_len pointer into which to store length of returned value.
4125  *                 0 if SNI extension is not present or not yet processed.
4126  *
4127  * \return         const pointer to SNI extension value.
4128  *                 - value is valid only when called in \c f_cert_cb
4129  *                   registered with \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb().
4130  *                 - value is NULL if SNI extension is not present.
4131  *                 - value is not '\0'-terminated. Use \c name_len for len.
4132  *                 - value must not be freed.
4133  */
4134 const unsigned char *mbedtls_ssl_get_hs_sni(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4135                                             size_t *name_len);
4136 
4137 /**
4138  * \brief          Set own certificate and key for the current handshake
4139  *
4140  * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() but for use within
4141  *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4142  *
4143  * \note           Passing null \c own_cert clears the certificate list for
4144  *                 the current handshake.
4145  *
4146  * \param ssl      SSL context
4147  * \param own_cert own public certificate chain
4148  * \param pk_key   own private key
4149  *
4150  * \return         0 on success or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED
4151  */
4152 int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_own_cert(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4153                                 mbedtls_x509_crt *own_cert,
4154                                 mbedtls_pk_context *pk_key);
4155 
4156 /**
4157  * \brief          Set the data required to verify peer certificate for the
4158  *                 current handshake
4159  *
4160  * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain() but for use within
4161  *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4162  *
4163  * \param ssl      SSL context
4164  * \param ca_chain trusted CA chain (meaning all fully trusted top-level CAs)
4165  * \param ca_crl   trusted CA CRLs
4166  */
4167 void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4168                                  mbedtls_x509_crt *ca_chain,
4169                                  mbedtls_x509_crl *ca_crl);
4170 
4171 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
4172 /**
4173  * \brief          Set DN hints sent to client in CertificateRequest message
4174  *
4175  * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_dn_hints() but for use within
4176  *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4177  *
4178  * \param ssl      SSL context
4179  * \param crt      crt chain whose subject DNs are issuer DNs of client certs
4180  *                 from which the client should select client peer certificate.
4181  */
4182 void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_dn_hints(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4183                                  const mbedtls_x509_crt *crt);
4184 #endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED */
4185 
4186 /**
4187  * \brief          Set authmode for the current handshake.
4188  *
4189  * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_authmode() but for use within
4190  *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4191  *
4192  * \param ssl      SSL context
4193  * \param authmode MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE, MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL or
4194  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED
4195  */
4196 void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_authmode(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4197                                  int authmode);
4198 
4199 /**
4200  * \brief          Set server side ServerName TLS extension callback
4201  *                 (optional, server-side only).
4202  *
4203  *                 If set, the ServerName callback is called whenever the
4204  *                 server receives a ServerName TLS extension from the client
4205  *                 during a handshake. The ServerName callback has the
4206  *                 following parameters: (void *parameter, mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4207  *                 const unsigned char *hostname, size_t len). If a suitable
4208  *                 certificate is found, the callback must set the
4209  *                 certificate(s) and key(s) to use with \c
4210  *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_own_cert() (can be called repeatedly),
4211  *                 and may optionally adjust the CA and associated CRL with \c
4212  *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain() as well as the client
4213  *                 authentication mode with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_authmode(),
4214  *                 then must return 0. If no matching name is found, the
4215  *                 callback may return non-zero to abort the handshake.
4216  *
4217  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4218  * \param f_sni    verification function
4219  * \param p_sni    verification parameter
4220  */
4221 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4222                           int (*f_sni)(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *,
4223                                        size_t),
4224                           void *p_sni);
4225 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION */
4226 
4227 #if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED)
4228 /**
4229  * \brief          Set the EC J-PAKE password for current handshake.
4230  *
4231  * \note           An internal copy is made, and destroyed as soon as the
4232  *                 handshake is completed, or when the SSL context is reset or
4233  *                 freed.
4234  *
4235  * \note           The SSL context needs to be already set up. The right place
4236  *                 to call this function is between \c mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
4237  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_reset() and \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
4238  *                 Password cannot be empty (see RFC 8236).
4239  *
4240  * \param ssl      SSL context
4241  * \param pw       EC J-PAKE password (pre-shared secret). It cannot be empty
4242  * \param pw_len   length of pw in bytes
4243  *
4244  * \return         0 on success, or a negative error code.
4245  */
4246 int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ecjpake_password(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4247                                         const unsigned char *pw,
4248                                         size_t pw_len);
4249 
4250 /**
4251  * \brief          Set the EC J-PAKE opaque password for current handshake.
4252  *
4253  * \note           The key must remain valid until the handshake is over.
4254  *
4255  * \note           The SSL context needs to be already set up. The right place
4256  *                 to call this function is between \c mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
4257  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_reset() and \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
4258  *
4259  * \param ssl      SSL context
4260  * \param pwd      EC J-PAKE opaque password
4261  *
4262  * \return         0 on success, or a negative error code.
4263  */
4264 int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ecjpake_password_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4265                                                mbedtls_svc_key_id_t pwd);
4266 #endif /*MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED */
4267 
4268 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
4269 /**
4270  * \brief          Set the supported Application Layer Protocols.
4271  *
4272  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4273  * \param protos   Pointer to a NULL-terminated list of supported protocols,
4274  *                 in decreasing preference order. The pointer to the list is
4275  *                 recorded by the library for later reference as required, so
4276  *                 the lifetime of the table must be at least as long as the
4277  *                 lifetime of the SSL configuration structure.
4278  *
4279  * \return         0 on success, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA.
4280  */
4281 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_alpn_protocols(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, const char **protos);
4282 
4283 /**
4284  * \brief          Get the name of the negotiated Application Layer Protocol.
4285  *                 This function should be called after the handshake is
4286  *                 completed.
4287  *
4288  * \param ssl      SSL context
4289  *
4290  * \return         Protocol name, or NULL if no protocol was negotiated.
4291  */
4292 const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_alpn_protocol(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4293 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN */
4294 
4295 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
4296 #if defined(MBEDTLS_DEBUG_C)
mbedtls_ssl_get_srtp_profile_as_string(mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile profile)4297 static inline const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_srtp_profile_as_string(mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile profile)
4298 {
4299     switch (profile) {
4300         case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80:
4301             return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80";
4302         case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32:
4303             return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32";
4304         case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80:
4305             return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80";
4306         case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32:
4307             return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32";
4308         default: break;
4309     }
4310     return "";
4311 }
4312 #endif /* MBEDTLS_DEBUG_C */
4313 /**
4314  * \brief                   Manage support for mki(master key id) value
4315  *                          in use_srtp extension.
4316  *                          MKI is an optional part of SRTP used for key management
4317  *                          and re-keying. See RFC3711 section 3.1 for details.
4318  *                          The default value is
4319  *                          #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED.
4320  *
4321  * \param conf              The SSL configuration to manage mki support.
4322  * \param support_mki_value Enable or disable mki usage. Values are
4323  *                          #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED
4324  *                          or #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_SUPPORTED.
4325  */
4326 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_srtp_mki_value_supported(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4327                                                int support_mki_value);
4328 
4329 /**
4330  * \brief                   Set the supported DTLS-SRTP protection profiles.
4331  *
4332  * \param conf              SSL configuration
4333  * \param profiles          Pointer to a List of MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET terminated
4334  *                          supported protection profiles
4335  *                          in decreasing preference order.
4336  *                          The pointer to the list is recorded by the library
4337  *                          for later reference as required, so the lifetime
4338  *                          of the table must be at least as long as the lifetime
4339  *                          of the SSL configuration structure.
4340  *                          The list must not hold more than
4341  *                          MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_PROFILE_LIST_LENGTH elements
4342  *                          (excluding the terminating MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET).
4343  *
4344  * \return                  0 on success
4345  * \return                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA when the list of
4346  *                          protection profiles is incorrect.
4347  */
4348 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_srtp_protection_profiles
4349     (mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4350     const mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile *profiles);
4351 
4352 /**
4353  * \brief                  Set the mki_value for the current DTLS-SRTP session.
4354  *
4355  * \param ssl              SSL context to use.
4356  * \param mki_value        The MKI value to set.
4357  * \param mki_len          The length of the MKI value.
4358  *
4359  * \note                   This function is relevant on client side only.
4360  *                         The server discovers the mki value during handshake.
4361  *                         A mki value set on server side using this function
4362  *                         is ignored.
4363  *
4364  * \return                 0 on success
4365  * \return                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA
4366  * \return                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE
4367  */
4368 int mbedtls_ssl_dtls_srtp_set_mki_value(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4369                                         unsigned char *mki_value,
4370                                         uint16_t mki_len);
4371 /**
4372  * \brief                  Get the negotiated DTLS-SRTP information:
4373  *                         Protection profile and MKI value.
4374  *
4375  * \warning                This function must be called after the handshake is
4376  *                         completed. The value returned by this function must
4377  *                         not be trusted or acted upon before the handshake completes.
4378  *
4379  * \param ssl              The SSL context to query.
4380  * \param dtls_srtp_info   The negotiated DTLS-SRTP information:
4381  *                         - Protection profile in use.
4382  *                         A direct mapping of the iana defined value for protection
4383  *                         profile on an uint16_t.
4384                    http://www.iana.org/assignments/srtp-protection/srtp-protection.xhtml
4385  *                         #MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET if the use of SRTP was not negotiated
4386  *                         or peer's Hello packet was not parsed yet.
4387  *                         - mki size and value( if size is > 0 ).
4388  */
4389 void mbedtls_ssl_get_dtls_srtp_negotiation_result(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4390                                                   mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info *dtls_srtp_info);
4391 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
4392 
4393 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
4394 /**
4395  * \brief          Set the maximum supported version sent from the client side
4396  *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4397  *
4398  *                 See also the documentation of mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_version().
4399  *
4400  * \note           This ignores ciphersuites from higher versions.
4401  *
4402  * \note           This function is deprecated and has been replaced by
4403  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_tls_version().
4404  *
4405  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4406  * \param major    Major version number (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3)
4407  * \param minor    Minor version number
4408  *                 (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3 for (D)TLS 1.2,
4409  *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4 for TLS 1.3)
4410  */
4411 void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int major,
4412                                                      int minor);
4413 #endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
4414 
4415 /**
4416  * \brief          Set the maximum supported version sent from the client side
4417  *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4418  *
4419  * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4420  *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4421  *                 negotiated.
4422  *
4423  * \param conf         SSL configuration
4424  * \param tls_version  TLS protocol version number (\c mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version)
4425  *                     (#MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN is not valid)
4426  */
mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_tls_version(mbedtls_ssl_config * conf,mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version tls_version)4427 static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_tls_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4428                                                     mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version tls_version)
4429 {
4430     conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_tls_version) = tls_version;
4431 }
4432 
4433 #if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
4434 /**
4435  * \brief          Set the minimum accepted SSL/TLS protocol version
4436  *
4437  * \note           By default, all supported versions are accepted.
4438  *                 Future versions of the library may disable older
4439  *                 protocol versions by default if they become deprecated.
4440  *
4441  * \note           The following versions are supported (if enabled at
4442  *                 compile time):
4443  *                 - (D)TLS 1.2: \p major = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3,
4444  *                   \p minor = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3
4445  *                 - TLS 1.3: \p major = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3,
4446  *                   \p minor = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4
4447  *
4448  *                 Note that the numbers in the constant names are the
4449  *                 TLS internal protocol numbers, and the minor versions
4450  *                 differ by one from the human-readable versions!
4451  *
4452  * \note           Input outside of the SSL_MAX_XXXXX_VERSION and
4453  *                 SSL_MIN_XXXXX_VERSION range is ignored.
4454  *
4455  * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4456  *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4457  *                 negotiated.
4458  *
4459  * \note           This function is deprecated and has been replaced by
4460  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_tls_version().
4461  *
4462  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4463  * \param major    Major version number (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3)
4464  * \param minor    Minor version number
4465  *                 (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3 for (D)TLS 1.2,
4466  *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4 for TLS 1.3)
4467  */
4468 void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int major,
4469                                                      int minor);
4470 #endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
4471 
4472 /**
4473  * \brief          Set the minimum supported version sent from the client side
4474  *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4475  *
4476  * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4477  *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4478  *                 negotiated.
4479  *
4480  * \param conf         SSL configuration
4481  * \param tls_version  TLS protocol version number (\c mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version)
4482  *                     (#MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN is not valid)
4483  */
mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_tls_version(mbedtls_ssl_config * conf,mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version tls_version)4484 static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_tls_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4485                                                     mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version tls_version)
4486 {
4487     conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(min_tls_version) = tls_version;
4488 }
4489 
4490 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
4491 /**
4492  * \brief           Enable or disable Encrypt-then-MAC
4493  *                  (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED)
4494  *
4495  * \note            This should always be enabled, it is a security
4496  *                  improvement, and should not cause any interoperability
4497  *                  issue (used only if the peer supports it too).
4498  *
4499  * \param conf      SSL configuration
4500  * \param etm       MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_DISABLED
4501  */
4502 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_encrypt_then_mac(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char etm);
4503 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC */
4504 
4505 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET)
4506 /**
4507  * \brief           Enable or disable Extended Master Secret negotiation.
4508  *                  (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED)
4509  *
4510  * \note            This should always be enabled, it is a security fix to the
4511  *                  protocol, and should not cause any interoperability issue
4512  *                  (used only if the peer supports it too).
4513  *
4514  * \param conf      SSL configuration
4515  * \param ems       MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_DISABLED
4516  */
4517 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_extended_master_secret(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char ems);
4518 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET */
4519 
4520 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
4521 /**
4522  * \brief          Whether to send a list of acceptable CAs in
4523  *                 CertificateRequest messages.
4524  *                 (Default: do send)
4525  *
4526  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4527  * \param cert_req_ca_list   MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_ENABLED or
4528  *                          MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_DISABLED
4529  */
4530 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_req_ca_list(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4531                                        char cert_req_ca_list);
4532 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
4533 
4534 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
4535 /**
4536  * \brief          Set the maximum fragment length to emit and/or negotiate.
4537  *                 (Typical: the smaller of #MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN and
4538  *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN, usually `2^14` bytes)
4539  *                 (Server: set maximum fragment length to emit,
4540  *                 usually negotiated by the client during handshake)
4541  *                 (Client: set maximum fragment length to emit *and*
4542  *                 negotiate with the server during handshake)
4543  *                 (Default: #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE)
4544  *
4545  * \note           On the client side, the maximum fragment length extension
4546  *                 *will not* be used, unless the maximum fragment length has
4547  *                 been set via this function to a value different than
4548  *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE.
4549  *
4550  * \note           With TLS, this currently only affects ApplicationData (sent
4551  *                 with \c mbedtls_ssl_read()), not handshake messages.
4552  *                 With DTLS, this affects both ApplicationData and handshake.
4553  *
4554  * \note           Defragmentation of TLS handshake messages is supported
4555  *                 with some limitations. See the documentation of
4556  *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake() for details.
4557  *
4558  * \note           This sets the maximum length for a record's payload,
4559  *                 excluding record overhead that will be added to it, see
4560  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion().
4561  *
4562  * \note           For DTLS, it is also possible to set a limit for the total
4563  *                 size of datagrams passed to the transport layer, including
4564  *                 record overhead, see \c mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu().
4565  *
4566  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4567  * \param mfl_code Code for maximum fragment length (allowed values:
4568  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_512,  MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_1024,
4569  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_2048, MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_4096)
4570  *
4571  * \return         0 if successful or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA
4572  */
4573 int mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_frag_len(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, unsigned char mfl_code);
4574 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH */
4575 
4576 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
4577 /**
4578  * \brief          Pick the ciphersuites order according to the second parameter
4579  *                 in the SSL Server module (MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C).
4580  *                 (Default, if never called: MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER)
4581  *
4582  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4583  * \param order    Server or client (MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER
4584  *                                or MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_CLIENT)
4585  */
4586 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_preference_order(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int order);
4587 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
4588 
4589 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
4590 /**
4591  * \brief          Enable / Disable TLS 1.2 session tickets (client only,
4592  *                 TLS 1.2 only). Enabled by default.
4593  *
4594  * \note           On server, use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets_cb().
4595  *
4596  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4597  * \param use_tickets   Enable or disable (#MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED or
4598  *                                         #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED)
4599  */
4600 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int use_tickets);
4601 
4602 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
4603 /**
4604  * \brief Enable / Disable handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket messages
4605  *        (client only, TLS 1.3 only).
4606  *
4607  *        The handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket messages is disabled by
4608  *        default.
4609  *
4610  *        In TLS 1.3, servers may send a NewSessionTicket message at any time,
4611  *        and may send multiple NewSessionTicket messages. By default, TLS 1.3
4612  *        clients ignore NewSessionTicket messages.
4613  *
4614  *        To support session tickets in TLS 1.3 clients, call this function
4615  *        with #MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED. When
4616  *        this is enabled, when a client receives a NewSessionTicket message,
4617  *        the next call to a message processing functions (notably
4618  *        mbedtls_ssl_handshake() and mbedtls_ssl_read()) will return
4619  *        #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET. The client should then
4620  *        call mbedtls_ssl_get_session() to retrieve the session ticket before
4621  *        calling the same message processing function again.
4622  *
4623  * \param conf  SSL configuration
4624  * \param signal_new_session_tickets Enable or disable
4625  *                                   (#MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED or
4626  *                                    #MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED)
4627  */
4628 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets(
4629     mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int signal_new_session_tickets);
4630 
4631 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
4632 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
4633 
4634 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
4635     defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
4636     defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
4637 /**
4638  * \brief   Number of NewSessionTicket messages for the server to send
4639  *          after handshake completion.
4640  *
4641  * \note    The default value is
4642  *          \c MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS.
4643  *
4644  * \note    In case of a session resumption, this setting only partially apply.
4645  *          At most one ticket is sent in that case to just renew the pool of
4646  *          tickets of the client. The rationale is to avoid the number of
4647  *          tickets on the server to become rapidly out of control when the
4648  *          server has the same configuration for all its connection instances.
4649  *
4650  * \param conf    SSL configuration
4651  * \param num_tickets    Number of NewSessionTicket.
4652  *
4653  */
4654 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_new_session_tickets(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4655                                           uint16_t num_tickets);
4656 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS &&
4657           MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C &&
4658           MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3*/
4659 
4660 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
4661 /**
4662  * \brief          Enable / Disable renegotiation support for connection when
4663  *                 initiated by peer
4664  *                 (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED)
4665  *
4666  * \warning        It is recommended to always disable renegotiation unless you
4667  *                 know you need it and you know what you're doing. In the
4668  *                 past, there have been several issues associated with
4669  *                 renegotiation or a poor understanding of its properties.
4670  *
4671  * \note           Server-side, enabling renegotiation also makes the server
4672  *                 susceptible to a resource DoS by a malicious client.
4673  *
4674  * \param conf    SSL configuration
4675  * \param renegotiation     Enable or disable (MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_ENABLED or
4676  *                                             MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED)
4677  */
4678 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int renegotiation);
4679 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
4680 
4681 /**
4682  * \brief          Prevent or allow legacy renegotiation.
4683  *                 (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION)
4684  *
4685  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION allows connections to
4686  *                 be established even if the peer does not support
4687  *                 secure renegotiation, but does not allow renegotiation
4688  *                 to take place if not secure.
4689  *                 (Interoperable and secure option)
4690  *
4691  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_ALLOW_RENEGOTIATION allows renegotiations
4692  *                 with non-upgraded peers. Allowing legacy renegotiation
4693  *                 makes the connection vulnerable to specific man in the
4694  *                 middle attacks. (See RFC 5746)
4695  *                 (Most interoperable and least secure option)
4696  *
4697  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE breaks off connections
4698  *                 if peer does not support secure renegotiation. Results
4699  *                 in interoperability issues with non-upgraded peers
4700  *                 that do not support renegotiation altogether.
4701  *                 (Most secure option, interoperability issues)
4702  *
4703  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4704  * \param allow_legacy  Prevent or allow (SSL_NO_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION,
4705  *                                        SSL_ALLOW_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION or
4706  *                                        MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE)
4707  */
4708 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_legacy_renegotiation(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int allow_legacy);
4709 
4710 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
4711 /**
4712  * \brief          Enforce renegotiation requests.
4713  *                 (Default: enforced, max_records = 16)
4714  *
4715  *                 When we request a renegotiation, the peer can comply or
4716  *                 ignore the request. This function allows us to decide
4717  *                 whether to enforce our renegotiation requests by closing
4718  *                 the connection if the peer doesn't comply.
4719  *
4720  *                 However, records could already be in transit from the peer
4721  *                 when the request is emitted. In order to increase
4722  *                 reliability, we can accept a number of records before the
4723  *                 expected handshake records.
4724  *
4725  *                 The optimal value is highly dependent on the specific usage
4726  *                 scenario.
4727  *
4728  * \note           With DTLS and server-initiated renegotiation, the
4729  *                 HelloRequest is retransmitted every time mbedtls_ssl_read() times
4730  *                 out or receives Application Data, until:
4731  *                 - max_records records have beens seen, if it is >= 0, or
4732  *                 - the number of retransmits that would happen during an
4733  *                 actual handshake has been reached.
4734  *                 Please remember the request might be lost a few times
4735  *                 if you consider setting max_records to a really low value.
4736  *
4737  * \warning        On client, the grace period can only happen during
4738  *                 mbedtls_ssl_read(), as opposed to mbedtls_ssl_write() and mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate()
4739  *                 which always behave as if max_record was 0. The reason is,
4740  *                 if we receive application data from the server, we need a
4741  *                 place to write it, which only happens during mbedtls_ssl_read().
4742  *
4743  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4744  * \param max_records Use MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_NOT_ENFORCED if you don't want to
4745  *                 enforce renegotiation, or a non-negative value to enforce
4746  *                 it but allow for a grace period of max_records records.
4747  */
4748 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation_enforced(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int max_records);
4749 
4750 /**
4751  * \brief          Set record counter threshold for periodic renegotiation.
4752  *                 (Default: 2^48 - 1)
4753  *
4754  *                 Renegotiation is automatically triggered when a record
4755  *                 counter (outgoing or incoming) crosses the defined
4756  *                 threshold. The default value is meant to prevent the
4757  *                 connection from being closed when the counter is about to
4758  *                 reached its maximal value (it is not allowed to wrap).
4759  *
4760  *                 Lower values can be used to enforce policies such as "keys
4761  *                 must be refreshed every N packets with cipher X".
4762  *
4763  *                 The renegotiation period can be disabled by setting
4764  *                 conf->disable_renegotiation to
4765  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED.
4766  *
4767  * \note           When the configured transport is
4768  *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM the maximum renegotiation
4769  *                 period is 2^48 - 1, and for MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM,
4770  *                 the maximum renegotiation period is 2^64 - 1.
4771  *
4772  * \param conf     SSL configuration
4773  * \param period   The threshold value: a big-endian 64-bit number.
4774  */
4775 void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation_period(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4776                                            const unsigned char period[8]);
4777 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
4778 
4779 /**
4780  * \brief          Check if there is data already read from the
4781  *                 underlying transport but not yet processed.
4782  *
4783  * \param ssl      SSL context
4784  *
4785  * \return         0 if nothing's pending, 1 otherwise.
4786  *
4787  * \note           This is different in purpose and behaviour from
4788  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes_avail in that it considers
4789  *                 any kind of unprocessed data, not only unread
4790  *                 application data. If \c mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes
4791  *                 returns a non-zero value, this function will
4792  *                 also signal pending data, but the converse does
4793  *                 not hold. For example, in DTLS there might be
4794  *                 further records waiting to be processed from
4795  *                 the current underlying transport's datagram.
4796  *
4797  * \note           If this function returns 1 (data pending), this
4798  *                 does not imply that a subsequent call to
4799  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_read will provide any data;
4800  *                 e.g., the unprocessed data might turn out
4801  *                 to be an alert or a handshake message.
4802  *
4803  * \note           This function is useful in the following situation:
4804  *                 If the SSL/TLS module successfully returns from an
4805  *                 operation - e.g. a handshake or an application record
4806  *                 read - and you're awaiting incoming data next, you
4807  *                 must not immediately idle on the underlying transport
4808  *                 to have data ready, but you need to check the value
4809  *                 of this function first. The reason is that the desired
4810  *                 data might already be read but not yet processed.
4811  *                 If, in contrast, a previous call to the SSL/TLS module
4812  *                 returned MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, it is not necessary
4813  *                 to call this function, as the latter error code entails
4814  *                 that all internal data has been processed.
4815  *
4816  */
4817 int mbedtls_ssl_check_pending(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4818 
4819 /**
4820  * \brief          Return the number of application data bytes
4821  *                 remaining to be read from the current record.
4822  *
4823  * \param ssl      SSL context
4824  *
4825  * \return         How many bytes are available in the application
4826  *                 data record read buffer.
4827  *
4828  * \note           When working over a datagram transport, this is
4829  *                 useful to detect the current datagram's boundary
4830  *                 in case \c mbedtls_ssl_read has written the maximal
4831  *                 amount of data fitting into the input buffer.
4832  *
4833  */
4834 size_t mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes_avail(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4835 
4836 /**
4837  * \brief          Return the result of the certificate verification
4838  *
4839  * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
4840  *
4841  * \return         \c 0 if the certificate verification was successful.
4842  * \return         \c -1u if the result is not available. This may happen
4843  *                 e.g. if the handshake aborts early, or a verification
4844  *                 callback returned a fatal error.
4845  * \return         A bitwise combination of \c MBEDTLS_X509_BADCERT_XXX
4846  *                 and \c MBEDTLS_X509_BADCRL_XXX failure flags; see x509.h.
4847  */
4848 uint32_t mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4849 
4850 /**
4851  * \brief          Return the id of the current ciphersuite
4852  *
4853  * \param ssl      SSL context
4854  *
4855  * \return         a ciphersuite id
4856  */
4857 int mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_id_from_ssl(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4858 
4859 /**
4860  * \brief          Return the name of the current ciphersuite
4861  *
4862  * \param ssl      SSL context
4863  *
4864  * \return         a string containing the ciphersuite name
4865  */
4866 const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4867 
4868 
4869 /**
4870  * \brief          Return the (D)TLS protocol version negotiated in the
4871  *                 given connection.
4872  *
4873  * \note           If you call this function too early during the initial
4874  *                 handshake, before the two sides have agreed on a version,
4875  *                 this function returns #MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN.
4876  *
4877  * \param ssl      The SSL context to query.
4878  * \return         The negotiated protocol version.
4879  */
mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number(const mbedtls_ssl_context * ssl)4880 static inline mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number(
4881     const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
4882 {
4883     return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
4884 }
4885 
4886 /**
4887  * \brief          Return the current TLS version
4888  *
4889  * \param ssl      SSL context
4890  *
4891  * \return         a string containing the TLS version
4892  */
4893 const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_version(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4894 
4895 /**
4896  * \brief          Return the (maximum) number of bytes added by the record
4897  *                 layer: header + encryption/MAC overhead (inc. padding)
4898  *
4899  * \param ssl      SSL context
4900  *
4901  * \return         Current maximum record expansion in bytes
4902  */
4903 int mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4904 
4905 /**
4906  * \brief          Return the current maximum outgoing record payload in bytes.
4907  *
4908  * \note           The logic to determine the maximum outgoing record payload is
4909  *                 version-specific. It takes into account various factors, such as
4910  *                 the mbedtls_config.h setting \c MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN, extensions
4911  *                 such as the max fragment length or record size limit extension if
4912  *                 used, and for DTLS the path MTU as configured and current
4913  *                 record expansion.
4914  *
4915  * \note           With DTLS, \c mbedtls_ssl_write() will return an error if
4916  *                 called with a larger length value.
4917  *                 With TLS, \c mbedtls_ssl_write() will fragment the input if
4918  *                 necessary and return the number of bytes written; it is up
4919  *                 to the caller to call \c mbedtls_ssl_write() again in
4920  *                 order to send the remaining bytes if any.
4921  *
4922  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload()
4923  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion()
4924  *
4925  * \param ssl      SSL context
4926  *
4927  * \return         Current maximum payload for an outgoing record,
4928  *                 or a negative error code.
4929  */
4930 int mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4931 
4932 /**
4933  * \brief          Return the current maximum incoming record payload in bytes.
4934  *
4935  * \note           The logic to determine the maximum incoming record payload is
4936  *                 version-specific. It takes into account various factors, such as
4937  *                 the mbedtls_config.h setting \c MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN, extensions
4938  *                 such as the max fragment length extension or record size limit
4939  *                 extension if used, and the current record expansion.
4940  *
4941  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu()
4942  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_max_in_record_payload()
4943  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion()
4944  *
4945  * \param ssl      SSL context
4946  *
4947  * \return         Current maximum payload for an incoming record,
4948  *                 or a negative error code.
4949  */
4950 int mbedtls_ssl_get_max_in_record_payload(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4951 
4952 #if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
4953 /**
4954  * \brief          Return the peer certificate from the current connection.
4955  *
4956  * \param  ssl     The SSL context to use. This must be initialized and setup.
4957  *
4958  * \return         The current peer certificate, if available.
4959  *                 The returned certificate is owned by the SSL context and
4960  *                 is valid only until the next call to the SSL API.
4961  * \return         \c NULL if no peer certificate is available. This might
4962  *                 be because the chosen ciphersuite doesn't use CRTs
4963  *                 (PSK-based ciphersuites, for example), or because
4964  *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE has been disabled,
4965  *                 allowing the stack to free the peer's CRT to save memory.
4966  *
4967  * \note           For one-time inspection of the peer's certificate during
4968  *                 the handshake, consider registering an X.509 CRT verification
4969  *                 callback through mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() instead of calling
4970  *                 this function. Using mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() also comes at
4971  *                 the benefit of allowing you to influence the verification
4972  *                 process, for example by masking expected and tolerated
4973  *                 verification failures.
4974  *
4975  * \warning        You must not use the pointer returned by this function
4976  *                 after any further call to the SSL API, including
4977  *                 mbedtls_ssl_read() and mbedtls_ssl_write(); this is
4978  *                 because the pointer might change during renegotiation,
4979  *                 which happens transparently to the user.
4980  *                 If you want to use the certificate across API calls,
4981  *                 you must make a copy.
4982  */
4983 const mbedtls_x509_crt *mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cert(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4984 #endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
4985 
4986 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
4987 /**
4988  * \brief          Export a session in order to resume it later.
4989  *
4990  * \param ssl      The SSL context representing the connection for which to
4991  *                 to export a session structure for later resumption.
4992  * \param session  The target structure in which to store the exported session.
4993  *                 This must have been initialized with mbedtls_ssl_session_init()
4994  *                 but otherwise be unused.
4995  *
4996  * \note           This function can handle a variety of mechanisms for session
4997  *                 resumption: For TLS 1.2, both session ID-based resumption and
4998  *                 ticket-based resumption will be considered. For TLS 1.3,
4999  *                 sessions equate to tickets, and if session tickets are
5000  *                 enabled (see #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration
5001  *                 option), this function exports the last received ticket and
5002  *                 the exported session may be used to resume the TLS 1.3
5003  *                 session. If session tickets are disabled, exported sessions
5004  *                 cannot be used to resume a TLS 1.3 session.
5005  *
5006  * \return         \c 0 if successful. In this case, \p session can be used for
5007  *                 session resumption by passing it to mbedtls_ssl_set_session(),
5008  *                 and serialized for storage via mbedtls_ssl_session_save().
5009  * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
5010  *
5011  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_set_session()
5012  * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_session_save()
5013  */
5014 int mbedtls_ssl_get_session(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5015                             mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
5016 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
5017 
5018 /**
5019  * \brief          Perform the SSL handshake
5020  *
5021  * \param ssl      SSL context
5022  *
5023  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
5024  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
5025  *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
5026  *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
5027  *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
5028  *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
5029  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
5030  *                 operation is in progress (see
5031  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
5032  *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
5033  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
5034  *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
5035  *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
5036  *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
5037  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED if DTLS is in use
5038  *                 and the client did not demonstrate reachability yet - in
5039  *                 this case you must stop using the context (see below).
5040  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
5041  *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received. See the
5042  *                 documentation of mbedtls_ssl_read() for more information
5043  *                 about this error code.
5044  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
5045  *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
5046  *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
5047  *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
5048  *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
5049  *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
5050  *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
5051  * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
5052  *                 the context (see below).
5053  *
5054  * \warning        If this function returns something other than
5055  *                 \c 0,
5056  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
5057  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5058  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS or
5059  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
5060  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5061  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
5062  *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
5063  *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
5064  *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
5065  *                 connection must be closed.
5066  *
5067  * \note           If DTLS is in use, then you may choose to handle
5068  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED specially for logging
5069  *                 purposes, as it is an expected return value rather than an
5070  *                 actual error, but you still need to reset/free the context.
5071  *
5072  * \note           Remarks regarding event-driven DTLS:
5073  *                 If the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, no datagram
5074  *                 from the underlying transport layer is currently being processed,
5075  *                 and it is safe to idle until the timer or the underlying transport
5076  *                 signal a new event. This is not true for a successful handshake,
5077  *                 in which case the datagram of the underlying transport that is
5078  *                 currently being processed might or might not contain further
5079  *                 DTLS records.
5080  *
5081  * \note           If #MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO is enabled, the PSA crypto
5082  *                 subsystem must have been initialized by calling
5083  *                 psa_crypto_init() before calling this function.
5084  *                 Otherwise, the handshake may call psa_crypto_init()
5085  *                 if a negotiation involving TLS 1.3 takes place (this may
5086  *                 be the case even if TLS 1.3 is offered but eventually
5087  *                 not selected).
5088  *
5089  * \note           In TLS, reception of fragmented handshake messages is
5090  *                 supported with some limitations (those limitations do
5091  *                 not apply to DTLS, where defragmentation is fully
5092  *                 supported):
5093  *                 - On an Mbed TLS server that only accepts TLS 1.2,
5094  *                   the initial ClientHello message must not be fragmented.
5095  *                   A TLS 1.2 ClientHello may be fragmented if the server
5096  *                   also accepts TLS 1.3 connections (meaning
5097  *                   that #MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 enabled, and the
5098  *                   accepted versions have not been restricted with
5099  *                   mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_tls_version() or the like).
5100  *                 - The first fragment of a handshake message must be
5101  *                   at least 4 bytes long.
5102  *                 - Non-handshake records must not be interleaved between
5103  *                   the fragments of a handshake message. (This is permitted
5104  *                   in TLS 1.2 but not in TLS 1.3, but Mbed TLS rejects it
5105  *                   even in TLS 1.2.)
5106  */
5107 int mbedtls_ssl_handshake(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5108 
5109 /**
5110  * \brief          After calling mbedtls_ssl_handshake() to start the SSL
5111  *                 handshake you can call this function to check whether the
5112  *                 handshake is over for a given SSL context. This function
5113  *                 should be also used to determine when to stop calling
5114  *                 mbedtls_handshake_step() for that context.
5115  *
5116  * \param ssl      SSL context
5117  *
5118  * \return         \c 1 if handshake is over, \c 0 if it is still ongoing.
5119  */
mbedtls_ssl_is_handshake_over(mbedtls_ssl_context * ssl)5120 static inline int mbedtls_ssl_is_handshake_over(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
5121 {
5122     return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state) >= MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_OVER;
5123 }
5124 
5125 /**
5126  * \brief          Perform a single step of the SSL handshake
5127  *
5128  * \note           The state of the context (ssl->state) will be at
5129  *                 the next state after this function returns \c 0. Do not
5130  *                 call this function if mbedtls_ssl_is_handshake_over()
5131  *                 returns \c 1.
5132  *
5133  * \warning        Whilst in the past you may have used direct access to the
5134  *                 context state (ssl->state) in order to ascertain when to
5135  *                 stop calling this function and although you can still do
5136  *                 so with something like ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state) or by
5137  *                 defining MBEDTLS_ALLOW_PRIVATE_ACCESS, this is now
5138  *                 considered deprecated and could be broken in any future
5139  *                 release. If you still find you have good reason for such
5140  *                 direct access, then please do contact the team to explain
5141  *                 this (raise an issue or post to the mailing list), so that
5142  *                 we can add a solution to your problem that will be
5143  *                 guaranteed to work in the future.
5144  *
5145  * \param ssl      SSL context
5146  *
5147  * \return         See mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
5148  *
5149  * \warning        If this function returns something other than \c 0,
5150  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5151  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5152  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
5153  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5154  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA, you must stop using
5155  *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it
5156  *                 or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before
5157  *                 re-using it for a new connection; the current connection
5158  *                 must be closed.
5159  */
5160 int mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5161 
5162 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
5163 /**
5164  * \brief          Initiate an SSL renegotiation on the running connection.
5165  *                 Client: perform the renegotiation right now.
5166  *                 Server: request renegotiation, which will be performed
5167  *                 during the next call to mbedtls_ssl_read() if honored by
5168  *                 client.
5169  *
5170  * \param ssl      SSL context
5171  *
5172  * \return         0 if successful, or any mbedtls_ssl_handshake() return
5173  *                 value except #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT that can't
5174  *                 happen during a renegotiation.
5175  *
5176  * \warning        If this function returns something other than \c 0,
5177  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5178  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS or
5179  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS, you must stop using
5180  *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it
5181  *                 or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before
5182  *                 re-using it for a new connection; the current connection
5183  *                 must be closed.
5184  *
5185  */
5186 int mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5187 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
5188 
5189 /**
5190  * \brief          Read at most 'len' application data bytes
5191  *
5192  * \param ssl      SSL context
5193  * \param buf      buffer that will hold the data
5194  * \param len      maximum number of bytes to read
5195  *
5196  * \return         The (positive) number of bytes read if successful.
5197  * \return         \c 0 if the read end of the underlying transport was closed
5198  *                 without sending a CloseNotify beforehand, which might happen
5199  *                 because of various reasons (internal error of an underlying
5200  *                 stack, non-conformant peer not sending a CloseNotify and
5201  *                 such) - in this case you must stop using the context
5202  *                 (see below).
5203  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PEER_CLOSE_NOTIFY if the underlying
5204  *                 transport is still functional, but the peer has
5205  *                 acknowledged to not send anything anymore.
5206  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
5207  *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
5208  *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
5209  *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
5210  *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
5211  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
5212  *                 operation is in progress (see
5213  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
5214  *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
5215  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
5216  *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
5217  *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
5218  *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
5219  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT if we're at the server
5220  *                 side of a DTLS connection and the client is initiating a
5221  *                 new connection using the same source port. See below.
5222  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
5223  *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received.
5224  *                 This error code is only returned on the client side. It is
5225  *                 only returned if handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket
5226  *                 messages has been enabled through
5227  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets().
5228  *                 This error code indicates that a TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket
5229  *                 message has been received and parsed successfully by the
5230  *                 client. The ticket data can be retrieved from the SSL
5231  *                 context by calling mbedtls_ssl_get_session(). It remains
5232  *                 available until the next call to mbedtls_ssl_read().
5233  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
5234  *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
5235  *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
5236  *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
5237  *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
5238  *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
5239  *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
5240  * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
5241  *                 the context (see below).
5242  *
5243  * \warning        If this function returns something other than
5244  *                 a positive value,
5245  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
5246  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5247  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5248  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS,
5249  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT or
5250  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5251  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
5252  *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
5253  *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
5254  *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
5255  *                 connection must be closed.
5256  *
5257  * \note           When this function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT
5258  *                 (which can only happen server-side), it means that a client
5259  *                 is initiating a new connection using the same source port.
5260  *                 You can either treat that as a connection close and wait
5261  *                 for the client to resend a ClientHello, or directly
5262  *                 continue with \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() with the same
5263  *                 context (as it has been reset internally). Either way, you
5264  *                 must make sure this is seen by the application as a new
5265  *                 connection: application state, if any, should be reset, and
5266  *                 most importantly the identity of the client must be checked
5267  *                 again. WARNING: not validating the identity of the client
5268  *                 again, or not transmitting the new identity to the
5269  *                 application layer, would allow authentication bypass!
5270  *
5271  * \note           Remarks regarding event-driven DTLS:
5272  *                 - If the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, no datagram
5273  *                   from the underlying transport layer is currently being processed,
5274  *                   and it is safe to idle until the timer or the underlying transport
5275  *                   signal a new event.
5276  *                 - This function may return MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ even if data was
5277  *                   initially available on the underlying transport, as this data may have
5278  *                   been only e.g. duplicated messages or a renegotiation request.
5279  *                   Therefore, you must be prepared to receive MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ even
5280  *                   when reacting to an incoming-data event from the underlying transport.
5281  *                 - On success, the datagram of the underlying transport that is currently
5282  *                   being processed may contain further DTLS records. You should call
5283  *                   \c mbedtls_ssl_check_pending to check for remaining records.
5284  *
5285  */
5286 int mbedtls_ssl_read(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5287 
5288 /**
5289  * \brief          Try to write exactly 'len' application data bytes
5290  *
5291  * \warning        This function will do partial writes in some cases. If the
5292  *                 return value is non-negative but less than length, the
5293  *                 function must be called again with updated arguments:
5294  *                 buf + ret, len - ret (if ret is the return value) until
5295  *                 it returns a value equal to the last 'len' argument.
5296  *
5297  * \param ssl      SSL context
5298  * \param buf      buffer holding the data
5299  * \param len      how many bytes must be written
5300  *
5301  * \return         The (non-negative) number of bytes actually written if
5302  *                 successful (may be less than \p len).
5303  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
5304  *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
5305  *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
5306  *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
5307  *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
5308  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
5309  *                 operation is in progress (see
5310  *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
5311  *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
5312  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
5313  *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
5314  *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
5315  *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
5316  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
5317  *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received. See the
5318  *                 documentation of mbedtls_ssl_read() for more information
5319  *                 about this error code.
5320  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
5321  *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
5322  *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
5323  *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
5324  *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
5325  *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
5326  *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
5327  * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
5328  *                 the context (see below).
5329  *
5330  * \warning        If this function returns something other than
5331  *                 a non-negative value,
5332  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
5333  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5334  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5335  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
5336  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5337  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
5338  *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
5339  *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
5340  *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
5341  *                 connection must be closed.
5342  *
5343  * \note           When this function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE/READ,
5344  *                 it must be called later with the *same* arguments,
5345  *                 until it returns a value greater than or equal to 0. When
5346  *                 the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE there may be
5347  *                 some partial data in the output buffer, however this is not
5348  *                 yet sent.
5349  *
5350  * \note           If the requested length is greater than the maximum
5351  *                 fragment length (either the built-in limit or the one set
5352  *                 or negotiated with the peer), then:
5353  *                 - with TLS, less bytes than requested are written.
5354  *                 - with DTLS, MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA is returned.
5355  *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload() may be used to
5356  *                 query the active maximum fragment length.
5357  *
5358  * \note           Attempting to write 0 bytes will result in an empty TLS
5359  *                 application record being sent.
5360  */
5361 int mbedtls_ssl_write(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5362 
5363 /**
5364  * \brief           Send an alert message
5365  *
5366  * \param ssl       SSL context
5367  * \param level     The alert level of the message
5368  *                  (MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_WARNING or MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_FATAL)
5369  * \param message   The alert message (SSL_ALERT_MSG_*)
5370  *
5371  * \return          0 if successful, or a specific SSL error code.
5372  *
5373  * \note           If this function returns something other than 0 or
5374  *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ/WRITE, you must stop using
5375  *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it or
5376  *                 call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before re-using it
5377  *                 for a new connection; the current connection must be closed.
5378  */
5379 int mbedtls_ssl_send_alert_message(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5380                                    unsigned char level,
5381                                    unsigned char message);
5382 /**
5383  * \brief          Notify the peer that the connection is being closed
5384  *
5385  * \param ssl      SSL context
5386  *
5387  * \return          0 if successful, or a specific SSL error code.
5388  *
5389  * \note           If this function returns something other than 0 or
5390  *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ/WRITE, you must stop using
5391  *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it or
5392  *                 call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before re-using it
5393  *                 for a new connection; the current connection must be closed.
5394  */
5395 int mbedtls_ssl_close_notify(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5396 
5397 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
5398 
5399 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
5400 /**
5401  * \brief          Read at most 'len' bytes of early data
5402  *
5403  * \note           This API is server specific.
5404  *
5405  * \warning        Early data is defined in the TLS 1.3 specification, RFC 8446.
5406  *                 IMPORTANT NOTE from section 2.3 of the specification:
5407  *
5408  *                 The security properties for 0-RTT data are weaker than
5409  *                 those for other kinds of TLS data. Specifically:
5410  *                 - This data is not forward secret, as it is encrypted
5411  *                   solely under keys derived using the offered PSK.
5412  *                 - There are no guarantees of non-replay between connections.
5413  *                   Protection against replay for ordinary TLS 1.3 1-RTT data
5414  *                   is provided via the server's Random value, but 0-RTT data
5415  *                   does not depend on the ServerHello and therefore has
5416  *                   weaker guarantees. This is especially relevant if the
5417  *                   data is authenticated either with TLS client
5418  *                   authentication or inside the application protocol. The
5419  *                   same warnings apply to any use of the
5420  *                   early_exporter_master_secret.
5421  *
5422  * \warning        Mbed TLS does not implement any of the anti-replay defenses
5423  *                 defined in section 8 of the TLS 1.3 specification:
5424  *                 single-use of tickets or ClientHello recording within a
5425  *                 given time window.
5426  *
5427  * \note           This function is used in conjunction with
5428  *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake(), mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(),
5429  *                 mbedtls_ssl_read() and mbedtls_ssl_write() to read early
5430  *                 data when these functions return
5431  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA.
5432  *
5433  * \param ssl      SSL context, it must have been initialized and set up.
5434  * \param buf      buffer that will hold the data
5435  * \param len      maximum number of bytes to read
5436  *
5437  * \return         The (positive) number of bytes read if successful.
5438  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
5439  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_READ_EARLY_DATA if it is not
5440  *                 possible to read early data for the SSL context \p ssl. Note
5441  *                 that this function is intended to be called for an SSL
5442  *                 context \p ssl only after a call to mbedtls_ssl_handshake(),
5443  *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or
5444  *                 mbedtls_ssl_write() for \p ssl that has returned
5445  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA.
5446  */
5447 int mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5448                                 unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5449 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
5450 
5451 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
5452 /**
5453  * \brief          Try to write exactly 'len' application data bytes while
5454  *                 performing the handshake (early data).
5455  *
5456  * \warning        Early data is defined in the TLS 1.3 specification, RFC 8446.
5457  *                 IMPORTANT NOTE from section 2.3 of the specification:
5458  *
5459  *                 The security properties for 0-RTT data are weaker than
5460  *                 those for other kinds of TLS data. Specifically:
5461  *                 - This data is not forward secret, as it is encrypted
5462  *                   solely under keys derived using the offered PSK.
5463  *                 - There are no guarantees of non-replay between connections.
5464  *                   Protection against replay for ordinary TLS 1.3 1-RTT data
5465  *                   is provided via the server's Random value, but 0-RTT data
5466  *                   does not depend on the ServerHello and therefore has
5467  *                   weaker guarantees. This is especially relevant if the
5468  *                   data is authenticated either with TLS client
5469  *                   authentication or inside the application protocol. The
5470  *                   same warnings apply to any use of the
5471  *                   early_exporter_master_secret.
5472  *
5473  * \note           This function behaves mainly as mbedtls_ssl_write(). The
5474  *                 specification of mbedtls_ssl_write() relevant to TLS 1.3
5475  *                 (thus not the parts specific to (D)TLS1.2) applies to this
5476  *                 function and the present documentation is mainly restricted
5477  *                 to the differences with mbedtls_ssl_write(). One noticeable
5478  *                 difference though is that mbedtls_ssl_write() aims to
5479  *                 complete the handshake before to write application data
5480  *                 while mbedtls_ssl_write_early() aims to drive the handshake
5481  *                 just past the point where it is not possible to send early
5482  *                 data anymore.
5483  *
5484  * \param ssl      SSL context
5485  * \param buf      buffer holding the data
5486  * \param len      how many bytes must be written
5487  *
5488  * \return         The (non-negative) number of bytes actually written if
5489  *                 successful (may be less than \p len).
5490  *
5491  * \return         One additional specific error code compared to
5492  *                 mbedtls_ssl_write():
5493  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA.
5494  *
5495  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA is returned when it
5496  *                 is not possible to write early data for the SSL context
5497  *                 \p ssl.
5498  *
5499  *                 It may have been possible and it is not possible
5500  *                 anymore because the client received the server Finished
5501  *                 message, the server rejected early data or the maximum
5502  *                 number of allowed early data for the PSK in use has been
5503  *                 reached.
5504  *
5505  *                 It may never have been possible and will never be possible
5506  *                 for the SSL context \p ssl because the use of early data
5507  *                 is disabled for that context or more generally the context
5508  *                 is not suitably configured to enable early data or the first
5509  *                 call to the function was done while the handshake was
5510  *                 already completed.
5511  *
5512  *                 It is not possible to write early data for the SSL context
5513  *                 \p ssl and any subsequent call to this API will return this
5514  *                 error code. But this does not preclude for using it with
5515  *                 mbedtls_ssl_write(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or
5516  *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake() and the handshake can be
5517  *                 completed by calling one of these APIs.
5518  *
5519  * \note           This function may write early data only if the SSL context
5520  *                 has been configured for the handshake with a PSK for which
5521  *                 early data is allowed.
5522  *
5523  * \note           To maximize the number of early data that can be written in
5524  *                 the course of the handshake, it is expected that this
5525  *                 function starts the handshake for the SSL context \p ssl.
5526  *                 But this is not mandatory.
5527  *
5528  * \note           This function does not provide any information on whether
5529  *                 the server has accepted or will accept early data or not.
5530  *                 When it returns a positive value, it just means that it
5531  *                 has written early data to the server. To know whether the
5532  *                 server has accepted early data or not, you should call
5533  *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status() with the handshake
5534  *                 completed.
5535  */
5536 int mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5537                                  const unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5538 
5539 /**
5540  * \brief Get the status of the negotiation of the use of early data.
5541  *
5542  * \param ssl      The SSL context to query
5543  *
5544  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if this function is called
5545  *                 from the server-side.
5546  *
5547  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if this function is called
5548  *                 prior to completion of the handshake.
5549  *
5550  * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_NOT_INDICATED if the client
5551  *                 has not indicated the use of early data to the server.
5552  *
5553  * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_ACCEPTED if the client has
5554  *                 indicated the use of early data and the server has accepted
5555  *                 it.
5556  *
5557  * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_REJECTED if the client has
5558  *                 indicated the use of early data but the server has rejected
5559  *                 it. In this situation, the client may want to re-send the
5560  *                 early data it may have tried to send by calling
5561  *                 mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data() as ordinary post-handshake
5562  *                 application data by calling mbedtls_ssl_write().
5563  *
5564  */
5565 int mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5566 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
5567 
5568 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
5569 
5570 /**
5571  * \brief          Free referenced items in an SSL context and clear memory
5572  *
5573  * \param ssl      SSL context
5574  */
5575 void mbedtls_ssl_free(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5576 
5577 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CONTEXT_SERIALIZATION)
5578 /**
5579  * \brief          Save an active connection as serialized data in a buffer.
5580  *                 This allows the freeing or re-using of the SSL context
5581  *                 while still picking up the connection later in a way that
5582  *                 it entirely transparent to the peer.
5583  *
5584  * \see            mbedtls_ssl_context_load()
5585  *
5586  * \note           The serialized data only contains the data that is
5587  *                 necessary to resume the connection: negotiated protocol
5588  *                 options, session identifier, keys, etc.
5589  *                 Loading a saved SSL context does not restore settings and
5590  *                 state related to how the application accesses the context,
5591  *                 such as configured callback functions, user data, pending
5592  *                 incoming or outgoing data, etc.
5593  *
5594  * \note           This feature is currently only available under certain
5595  *                 conditions, see the documentation of the return value
5596  *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA for details.
5597  *
5598  * \note           When this function succeeds, it calls
5599  *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on \p ssl which as a result is
5600  *                 no longer associated with the connection that has been
5601  *                 serialized. This avoids creating copies of the connection
5602  *                 state. You're then free to either re-use the context
5603  *                 structure for a different connection, or call
5604  *                 mbedtls_ssl_free() on it. See the documentation of
5605  *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() for more details.
5606  *
5607  * \param ssl      The SSL context to save. On success, it is no longer
5608  *                 associated with the connection that has been serialized.
5609  * \param buf      The buffer to write the serialized data to. It must be a
5610  *                 writeable buffer of at least \p buf_len bytes, or may be \c
5611  *                 NULL if \p buf_len is \c 0.
5612  * \param buf_len  The number of bytes available for writing in \p buf.
5613  * \param olen     The size in bytes of the data that has been or would have
5614  *                 been written. It must point to a valid \c size_t.
5615  *
5616  * \note           \p olen is updated to the correct value regardless of
5617  *                 whether \p buf_len was large enough. This makes it possible
5618  *                 to determine the necessary size by calling this function
5619  *                 with \p buf set to \c NULL and \p buf_len to \c 0. However,
5620  *                 the value of \p olen is only guaranteed to be correct when
5621  *                 the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL or
5622  *                 \c 0. If the return value is different, then the value of
5623  *                 \p olen is undefined.
5624  *
5625  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
5626  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL if \p buf is too small.
5627  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed
5628  *                 while resetting the context.
5629  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if a handshake is in
5630  *                 progress, or there is pending data for reading or sending,
5631  *                 or the connection does not use DTLS 1.2 with an AEAD
5632  *                 ciphersuite, or renegotiation is enabled.
5633  */
5634 int mbedtls_ssl_context_save(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5635                              unsigned char *buf,
5636                              size_t buf_len,
5637                              size_t *olen);
5638 
5639 /**
5640  * \brief          Load serialized connection data to an SSL context.
5641  *
5642  * \see            mbedtls_ssl_context_save()
5643  *
5644  * \warning        The same serialized data must never be loaded into more
5645  *                 that one context. In order to ensure that, after
5646  *                 successfully loading serialized data to an SSL context, you
5647  *                 should immediately destroy or invalidate all copies of the
5648  *                 serialized data that was loaded. Loading the same data in
5649  *                 more than one context would cause severe security failures
5650  *                 including but not limited to loss of confidentiality.
5651  *
5652  * \note           Before calling this function, the SSL context must be
5653  *                 prepared in one of the two following ways. The first way is
5654  *                 to take a context freshly initialised with
5655  *                 mbedtls_ssl_init() and call mbedtls_ssl_setup() on it with
5656  *                 the same ::mbedtls_ssl_config structure that was used in
5657  *                 the original connection. The second way is to
5658  *                 call mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on a context that was
5659  *                 previously prepared as above but used in the meantime.
5660  *                 Either way, you must not use the context to perform a
5661  *                 handshake between calling mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
5662  *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() and calling this function. You
5663  *                 may however call other setter functions in that time frame
5664  *                 as indicated in the note below.
5665  *
5666  * \note           Before or after calling this function successfully, you
5667  *                 also need to configure some connection-specific callbacks
5668  *                 and settings before you can use the connection again
5669  *                 (unless they were already set before calling
5670  *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() and the values are suitable for
5671  *                 the present connection). Specifically, you want to call
5672  *                 at least mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(),
5673  *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb(), and
5674  *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() or
5675  *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() if they were set originally.
5676  *                 All other SSL setter functions
5677  *                 are not necessary to call, either because they're only used
5678  *                 in handshakes, or because the setting is already saved. You
5679  *                 might choose to call them anyway, for example in order to
5680  *                 share code between the cases of establishing a new
5681  *                 connection and the case of loading an already-established
5682  *                 connection.
5683  *
5684  * \note           If you have new information about the path MTU, you want to
5685  *                 call mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu() after calling this function, as
5686  *                 otherwise this function would overwrite your
5687  *                 newly-configured value with the value that was active when
5688  *                 the context was saved.
5689  *
5690  * \note           When this function returns an error code, it calls
5691  *                 mbedtls_ssl_free() on \p ssl. In this case, you need to
5692  *                 prepare the context with the usual sequence starting with a
5693  *                 call to mbedtls_ssl_init() if you want to use it again.
5694  *
5695  * \param ssl      The SSL context structure to be populated. It must have
5696  *                 been prepared as described in the note above.
5697  * \param buf      The buffer holding the serialized connection data. It must
5698  *                 be a readable buffer of at least \p len bytes.
5699  * \param len      The size of the serialized data in bytes.
5700  *
5701  * \return         \c 0 if successful.
5702  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed.
5703  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH if the serialized data
5704  *                 comes from a different Mbed TLS version or build.
5705  * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
5706  */
5707 int mbedtls_ssl_context_load(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5708                              const unsigned char *buf,
5709                              size_t len);
5710 #endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CONTEXT_SERIALIZATION */
5711 
5712 /**
5713  * \brief          Initialize an SSL configuration context
5714  *                 Just makes the context ready for
5715  *                 mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults() or mbedtls_ssl_config_free().
5716  *
5717  * \note           You need to call mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults() unless you
5718  *                 manually set all of the relevant fields yourself.
5719  *
5720  * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5721  */
5722 void mbedtls_ssl_config_init(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
5723 
5724 /**
5725  * \brief          Load reasonable default SSL configuration values.
5726  *                 (You need to call mbedtls_ssl_config_init() first.)
5727  *
5728  * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5729  * \param endpoint MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
5730  * \param transport MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM for TLS, or
5731  *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM for DTLS
5732  * \param preset   a MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_XXX value
5733  *
5734  * \note           See \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_transport() for notes on DTLS.
5735  *
5736  * \return         0 if successful, or
5737  *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX_ALLOC_FAILED on memory allocation error.
5738  */
5739 int mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
5740                                 int endpoint, int transport, int preset);
5741 
5742 /**
5743  * \brief          Free an SSL configuration context
5744  *
5745  * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5746  */
5747 void mbedtls_ssl_config_free(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
5748 
5749 /**
5750  * \brief          Initialize SSL session structure
5751  *
5752  * \param session  SSL session
5753  */
5754 void mbedtls_ssl_session_init(mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
5755 
5756 /**
5757  * \brief          Free referenced items in an SSL session including the
5758  *                 peer certificate and clear memory
5759  *
5760  * \note           A session object can be freed even if the SSL context
5761  *                 that was used to retrieve the session is still in use.
5762  *
5763  * \param session  SSL session
5764  */
5765 void mbedtls_ssl_session_free(mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
5766 
5767 /**
5768  * \brief          TLS-PRF function for key derivation.
5769  *
5770  * \param prf      The tls_prf type function type to be used.
5771  * \param secret   Secret for the key derivation function.
5772  * \param slen     Length of the secret.
5773  * \param label    String label for the key derivation function,
5774  *                 terminated with null character.
5775  * \param random   Random bytes.
5776  * \param rlen     Length of the random bytes buffer.
5777  * \param dstbuf   The buffer holding the derived key.
5778  * \param dlen     Length of the output buffer.
5779  *
5780  * \return         0 on success. An SSL specific error on failure.
5781  */
5782 int  mbedtls_ssl_tls_prf(const mbedtls_tls_prf_types prf,
5783                          const unsigned char *secret, size_t slen,
5784                          const char *label,
5785                          const unsigned char *random, size_t rlen,
5786                          unsigned char *dstbuf, size_t dlen);
5787 
5788 #if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEYING_MATERIAL_EXPORT)
5789 /* Maximum value for key_len in mbedtls_ssl_export_keying material. Depending on the TLS
5790  * version and the negotiated ciphersuite, larger keys could in principle be exported,
5791  * but for simplicity, we define one limit that works in all cases. TLS 1.3 with SHA256
5792  * has the strictest limit: 255 blocks of SHA256 output, or 8160 bytes. */
5793 #define MBEDTLS_SSL_EXPORT_MAX_KEY_LEN 8160
5794 
5795 /**
5796  * \brief             TLS-Exporter to derive shared symmetric keys between server and client.
5797  *
5798  * \param ssl         SSL context from which to export keys. Must have finished the handshake.
5799  * \param out         Output buffer of length at least key_len bytes.
5800  * \param key_len     Length of the key to generate in bytes, must be at most
5801  *                    MBEDTLS_SSL_EXPORT_MAX_KEY_LEN (8160).
5802  * \param label       Label for which to generate the key of length label_len.
5803  * \param label_len   Length of label in bytes. Must be at most 249 in TLS 1.3.
5804  * \param context     Context of the key. Can be NULL if context_len or use_context is 0.
5805  * \param context_len Length of context. Must be < 2^16 in TLS 1.2.
5806  * \param use_context Indicates if a context should be used in deriving the key.
5807  *
5808  * \note TLS 1.2 makes a distinction between a 0-length context and no context.
5809  *       This is why the use_context argument exists. TLS 1.3 does not make
5810  *       this distinction. If use_context is 0 and TLS 1.3 is used, context and
5811  *       context_len are ignored and a 0-length context is used.
5812  *
5813  * \return            0 on success.
5814  * \return            MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if the handshake is not yet completed.
5815  * \return            An SSL-specific error on failure.
5816  */
5817 int mbedtls_ssl_export_keying_material(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5818                                        uint8_t *out, const size_t key_len,
5819                                        const char *label, const size_t label_len,
5820                                        const unsigned char *context, const size_t context_len,
5821                                        const int use_context);
5822 #endif
5823 #ifdef __cplusplus
5824 }
5825 #endif
5826 
5827 #endif /* ssl.h */
5828